OE Order Entry User Manual by 6Miqtt0

VIEWS: 8 PAGES: 286

									Order Entry User Manual

     VERSION:   4.8

     MAY 23, 2000
Order Entry User Manual                                                TABLE OF CONTENTS



1      Overview of the Order Entry Module.......................................1

2      Entering, Reviewing, and Processing Orders...............................3
2.1        Enter Care Area Orders..............................................11
2.2        Review Orders (by order date).......................................26
2.2.1        Amend Order Function..............................................33
2.2.2        Cancel Order Function.............................................35
2.2.3        Display Order Function............................................37
2.2.4        Enter/Edit Administrative Data Function...........................38
2.2.5        Enter Order Function..............................................39
2.2.6        Print Order Function..............................................40
2.2.7        Print Results Function............................................41
2.2.8        Renew Orders Function.............................................42
2.2.9        Sign Orders Function..............................................43
2.2.10       Verify Order Function.............................................44
2.2.11       View Appointment Function.........................................45
2.2.12       View Results Function.............................................46
2.3        Review Orders (by service date).....................................47
2.4        Enter Department Orders.............................................52
2.5        Process Orders......................................................60
2.5.1        Amend Order Function..............................................67
2.5.2        Delete Order Function.............................................69
2.5.3        Edit Status Function..............................................70
2.5.4        Edit Technician Function..........................................71
2.5.5        Enter Charge/Credit Function......................................72
2.5.6        Enter Order Function..............................................75
2.5.7        Renew Order Function..............................................76
2.5.8        Reprint Orders Function...........................................77
2.5.9        Sign Order Function...............................................79
2.5.10       View Appointment Function.........................................80
2.5.11       View History Function.............................................81
2.6        Process UNV/PRV/SCH Orders (by loc).................................82
2.7        Process Daily Orders................................................86
2.8        Process Renewable Orders............................................89
2.9        Process Renewable Orders (by Provider)..............................92
2.10       Sign Orders by Location.............................................97
2.11       Process/Sign Provider's Orders......................................99

3      Listing Orders and Displaying Order Details............................101
3.1        List Unverified Orders.............................................103
3.2        List Incomplete Orders (by patient)................................105
3.3        List Patient Orders................................................107
3.4        List Daily Orders..................................................110
3.5        Overdue Renewable Orders...........................................113
3.6        List Unsigned Orders...............................................115
3.7        Reprint Orders.....................................................117
3.8        Order Audit Trail..................................................120

4      Managing Patients' Diets...............................................122
4.1        Allowing Users to Modify a Diet....................................126
4.2        Summary: Managing Patients' Diets.................................130
4.3        Enter/Edit Patient's Dietary Data..................................132
4.4        View Dietary Data..................................................135
4.5        List Current Diets - Single Location...............................137
4.6        List Current Diets - Multiple Locations............................139
4.7        List Diet Changes..................................................141
4.8        List Patients on a Diet............................................144
4.9        Print Patient's Dietary History....................................146
4.10       Print Diet Review Report...........................................147
4.11       Print Meal Count...................................................148
4.12      Print   Meal Count by Location.......................................149
4.13      Print   Meal Labels..................................................150
4.14      Print   Meal Labels for a Day........................................152
4.15      Print   Nourishment Labels...........................................153

5      Viewing Patient Results................................................155
5.1        View Patient's Record..............................................156
5.2        MEDITECH Lab Inquiry...............................................157
5.3        MEDITECH Pathology Inquiry.........................................158

6      Managing Administrative and Admissions Data............................159
6.1        Summary: Managing Administrative and Admissions Data..............160
6.2        Enter/Edit Administrative Data.....................................161
6.3        View Administrative Data...........................................169
6.4        Copy Administrative & Diet Data....................................171
6.5        Administrative Data Audit Trail....................................173
6.6        Enter/Edit Temporary Location......................................175
6.7        Review Admissions Activity.........................................177
6.8        View Departmental Data.............................................179

7      Monitoring the Patient Population......................................181
7.1        Print Census.......................................................182
7.2        Print Bed Roster...................................................183
7.3        Rounds Report (without PCI)........................................185
7.4        Rounds Report By Doctor (without PCI)..............................187
7.5        Print/List Location Activity.......................................189
7.6        Enter/Edit Housekeeping Information................................190

8      Entering and Reviewing Requisitions (non-patient routines).............192
8.1        Enter Requisitions.................................................193
8.2        List Stock Requisitions............................................196
8.3        Print Requisition Log..............................................198
8.4        Reprint Requisition's Paperwork....................................200

9      Reporting Procedures...................................................202
9.1        Duplicate Procedures Report........................................204
9.2        Incomplete Procedures Report (by status)...........................206
9.3        Overdue Procedures Report..........................................208
9.4        Uncharged Procedures Report........................................210
9.5        Cancelled Procedures report........................................212
9.6        Daily Log..........................................................214
9.7        Medical Necessity Report...........................................216

10     Monitoring Billing.....................................................218
10.1       View Patient Billing Activity......................................219
10.2       Print Billing List.................................................220
10.3       Enter Department Charges...........................................222
10.4       Enter Department Charges (batch)...................................229
10.5       Record Performing Physician........................................233
10.6       Record Performing Physician (batch)................................235
10.7       List Orders Missing Performing Doctor..............................238

11     Reporting Statistics...................................................240
11.1       List Daily Procedure Statistics....................................242
11.2       List Period Procedure Statistics...................................245
11.3       List Doctor Statistics.............................................247
11.4       List Location Statistics...........................................250
11.5       List Technician Statistics.........................................253

12     Monitoring Module Operations...........................................256
12.1       Start/Stop Print Job...............................................258
12.2       Turn Module Interface On/Off.......................................260
12.3       List Print Job's Print Queue.......................................262
12.4       List Print Job's Delay Queue.......................................263
12.5       List Device's Print Queue..........................................264
12.6        List Device Audit Trail............................................265
12.7        List Management Of Devices.........................................266
12.8        Recover Unprinted Provider Order Sheets............................267
12.9        List Interface Audit Trail.........................................268
12.10       List Interface Queue...............................................269
12.11       Reprint Device's Orders............................................270
12.12       Print Queued Interface Orders......................................271
12.13       Turn Departmental Interface On/Off.................................272
12.14       Enter/Edit Training Printer........................................273

13      System Conventions.....................................................274
13.1        Managed Terminals and Restricted Users.............................275
13.2        Identifying a Patient..............................................276
13.3        Specifying Directions..............................................277

   INDEX....................................................................279
Overview of the Order Entry Module (1)                                Page 1


Chapter 1:   Overview of the Order Entry Module


MEDITECH's Order Entry Module provides a fast, accurate system for personnel to
enter orders for patient tests and procedures. They can also gain fast access
to test results and other clinical and administrative data.

The module links locations to clinical departments in a powerful network that
improves patient care because it reduces staff time required to:

     * Enter, review, and process orders

     * Manage patients' diets

     * View patient results

     * Manage administrative and admissions data

     * Monitor the patient population

     * Enter and review requisitions

     * Handle reports on procedures

     * Monitor billing

     * Report statistics


This manual describes each of these features in detail.


Additional User Manuals Relating to the Order Entry Module

Three additional manuals describe other features of the Order Entry Module:

     * Dictionary User Manual

     * Cashier's Option User Manual

     * Departmental Option User Manual


Role in MEDITECH's Integrated Health Care Information System (HCIS)

The Order Entry Module plays a pivotal role in MEDITECH's integrated health
care information system. The module receives information from the Admissions
Module and then sends information to other modules such as Billing/Accounts
Receivable, Laboratory, Nursing, Radiology, Patient Care Inquiry, and Pharmacy
Modules.
Overview of the Order Entry Module (1)                                Page 2



Organization of the Manual

The overview in the introductory chapter provides the information you need to
gain a comprehensive understanding of the Order Entry Module. The remainder of
the manual includes documentation of each of the routines in the module,
grouped according to user tasks.
Entering, Reviewing, and Processing Orders (2)                         Page 3



Chapter 2:   Entering, Reviewing, and Processing Orders


The central function of the Order Entry Module is to give health-care providers
the ability to enter orders for patient care quickly and accurately, and to
provide fast access to up-to-date information about the condition of a patient.

Through the module, orders are transmitted from the ordering location to
printers at designated receiving departments, or they are electronically
transferred to interfacing modules such as Laboratory, Radiology, and Nursing.

The routines described in this chapter allow you to enter orders, review them,
process them, and list them. Among the issues it addresses are:

         * who can enter orders

         * what types of orders can be entered:   for example, sets and series

         * what questions are asked of the user who enters an order

         * how the printing format for the order is determined

         * whether the orders are printed at a hospital location, or
           electronically transmitted to another module

         * who can review orders

         * who can process orders

         * who has access to other functions made available through review
           routines, such as verifying orders, editing them, cancelling them,
           or changing their status

         * when the order is billed

         * how the quantity or amount of an order can be changed
Entering, Reviewing, and Processing Orders (2)                         Page 4



Entering Orders

From one screen, users can enter orders for a single procedure, multiple
procedures, a set of procedures that are frequently entered at the same time,
or one procedure to be performed in series -- several times on the same
schedule. The orders can be for tests, treatments, diets, or nursing
interventions.

Each time a user enters an order for a specific procedure, customer-defined
questions associated with that procedure appear on the screen. Thus the
facility is sure to collect all the information needed to process the order.
Questions associated with all procedures in a particular category are
specified in the Category Dictionary, and questions associated with the
individual procedure are specified in the Procedure Dictionary.

Orders are transmitted to locations, as specified in the "Printing" section of
the Procedure Dictionary, where the format of the order is defined as well.
For each procedure, the facility can choose from standard output formats or
create their own output formats via NPR Report Writer.

Orders sent to Ancillary Departments are printed out on printers at those
locations; orders sent to Interfacing Modules are transmitted electronically.


Who Can Enter Orders

Users in two types of locations can enter orders through the Enter Orders
Routine. Each location is defined, in the Location Dictionary of the MIS
Module, as Inpatient, Outpatient, or Department.

In the Order Entry Module, Inpatient and Outpatient locations are further
defined as Care Areas. These are locations that administer patient care.
Examples are nursing floors.

In the Order Entry Module, Departments are designated simply as Departments.
These are locations that administer tests and treatments to patients.
Examples are Cardiology, Laboratory, and Radiology Departments.


Reviewing Orders

A user can review all orders entered for a patient through the Review Orders
(by order date) Routine, the Review Orders (by service date) Routine, or the
Process Orders Routine. Each of these routines shows details of the orders, and
also permits printing a copy of the order and, if the user has access to the
specific function, he or she can edit, cancel or verify an order. The
circumstances are controlled through the Access Dictionary, which allows your
facility to determine what capabilities of the Order Entry Module will be
accessible to each user.


Processing Orders
Entering, Reviewing, and Processing Orders (2)                         Page 5



There is a routine that allow users in Departments to process orders: that
is, to edit their status, delete or cancel them, reprint them, or enter
charges and credits against them. This is the Process Orders Routine for
Ancillary Departments.

Editing the Status of Orders

Before an order is transmitted, its status can be changed from Unverified
to Verified by an authorized user at a terminal associated with a Care
Area. Once the order is transmitted, however, its status can be changed only
by a user at a terminal associated with a Department.

An order that is electronically transmitted to an interfacing module
automatically attains the status of Logged when it is entered into the
interfacing module. Orders that are printed in non-interfacing Ancillary
Departments arrive at the Department with the status of Transmitted.
Through the routines for processing orders, departments can upgrade the status
of an order from Transmitted to Logged to In Process to
Complete.


Reprinting Orders

Users can identify a specific order and reprint the data associated with its
placement. When they reprint it, they can change the format of the printed
order, the destination(s) at which it will be printed, and the number of copies
that will be printed.


Cancelling Orders

Users can cancel orders that have not yet been transmitted to ancillary
departments or interfacing modules. They can also request cancellation of
transmitted orders. A user who requests cancellation of a transmitted order
must provide a valid reason for doing so.

When a cancellation request is entered for an order that was not sent to an
interfacing module, a request-for-cancellation notice is automatically printed
in all departments that received the original printed order.

When a cancellation request is entered for an order that was sent to an
interfacing module, the interfacing module automatically cancels the order or
denies the cancellation request.

If it cancels the order, a cancellation notice is automatically printed at the
ordering location.

If it denies the cancellation request, a notice is automatically printed in two
locations: 1) on the printer specified in the Procedure Dictionary for that
procedure as the destination for the interface format, and 2) at the
ordering location.

Orders that are cancelled, or for which cancellation is requested, are marked
Entering, Reviewing, and Processing Orders (2)                         Page 6



as such on the Review Orders Screens, which also show the reason for
cancellation.


Listing Orders

Users can obtain lists of orders by various selection criteria:

     * orders for a specific patient, or for all the patients at a location

     * unverified orders for a specific patient or for all the patients at
       a location

     * incomplete orders for a specific patient or for all the patients at
       a location.


Billing a Patient for an Order

In the Billing section of the Procedure Dictionary, a facility can define
several variables affecting the billing of an order to a patient's account. One
variable is the time at which an order is billed. Billing time depends on the
status of the order. The hospital defines a Bill-On Status for each
procedure. An order can be billed when it reaches the status of Transmitted,
Logged, In Process, or Complete.

Another variable is whether the charge for an order can be edited. Either the
Order Entry Module automatically generates a charge each time a procedure is
ordered, or the charge must be entered by an Ancillary Department. Any charge
that is entered by an Ancillary Department can also be changed through the
Enter Charge/Credit Routine. The quantity of the order can be changed through
this routine as well, and credit can be issued for it if appropriate.

Charging for orders which interface to another module is handled by the other
module. The Order Entry module does not generate charges for interfacing
orders.


Completing Administrative Data Before Filing Orders

Before allowing orders to be filed for a patient, the facility may wish to
verify that the user has entered the patient's key administrative data. For
example, you may want to ensure that users collect a patient's diagnosis and
allergy information prior to filing cardiology orders. Patient's
administrative data is entered via the Enter/Edit Administrative Data Routine.

Facilities can set up the Order Entry system to warn users who try to enter
patient orders before collecting key administrative data. In the OE
parameters, facilities designate which customer-defined queries on the
Administrative Data Screen are considered to be critical. If a user tries to
file an order before completing the key information, a warning indicates which
administrative data is missing. The user can override the flag and continue to
place the order if desired.
Entering, Reviewing, and Processing Orders (2)                          Page 7




Customer-Defined Queries: Transferring Responses Between Enter Orders
Routines and the Administrative Data Routine

Customer-defined queries may appear both in the Enter Orders routine and the
Enter/Edit Administrative Data routine. For example, a prompt asking users for
a primary diagnosis or a patient's allergies may appear in both routines. In
such cases, users in both routines can enter a response.

If a user responds to the query in the Enter/Edit Administrative Data routine,
your response appears as the default response to the prompt in the Enter Orders
routine. If you enter a different response to the same prompt in the Enter
Orders routine, the original response remains unchanged in the Enter/Edit
Administrative Data routine.


Transmitting Orders

This section describes what happens after a user enters an order, including how
the system prioritizes, and transmits orders to the proper destination.

Prioritizing Orders for Transmission

When a user enters an order, the module assigns a number to the order,
according to its priority, and places the order in a queue for transmission.

     00   -   STAT orders are placed at the top of the queue
     10   -   Urgent orders are next
     20   -   Routine orders are placed in queue behind Urgent orders
     30   -   Last in the queue come orders for a future date

Orders are placed in queues. The placement in a queue depends on the Printing
Format specified for the procedure in the Procedure Dictionary. All orders are
initially placed in the Print Queue. Those orders with an interface
format are transmitted from the Print Queue to an Interface Queue.

NOTE:   An order can have more than one format. For example, a facility might
        want all orders for chest x-rays 1) to be transmitted electronically to
        the Radiology Module, and 2) to be printed out on a printer in the
        Radiology Department.

        It would set up chest x-rays in the Procedure Dictionary with two
        Printing Formats: 1) interface, and 2) radm or rads.

        Printing Format 1 (interface) would cause an order to be transmitted
        to the Radiology Interface Queue for the Radiology Module to pick up.
        Printing Format 2 (radm or rads) would cause an order to remain
        in the Print Queue for transmission to a printer.


The Print Queue and the Delay Queue
Entering, Reviewing, and Processing Orders (2)                         Page 8



The module goes through orders in the Print Queue, trying to transmit them to
their designated destinations on a timely basis. If it is unable to transmit
an order after several tries, it moves it from the Print Queue into another
queue, called the Delay Queue. The rank ordering of orders by number is
the same in the Delay Queue as in the Print Queue.

There are several reasons why a module might not be able to transmit an order:

     * the printer at the designated location is off line or down

     * the designated interfacing module is down, and arrangements have not
       been made to print the orders in the interim

     * the designated destination is not an appropriate device from the Device
       Table

Once an order is in the Delay Queue, the module continues its attempts to
transmit it. The module goes through the orders in the Delay Queue after
it has tried to transmit all the orders in the Print Queue.


The Interface Queues

If two modules can communicate with each other, MEDITECH calls them
interfacing modules. In order for two modules to communicate effectively,
you must ensure that specific dictionary prompts and parameters are setup
appropriately.

There are eight Interface Queues: Blood Bank, Laboratory, Microbiology,
Pathology, Nursing, Radiology, Pharmacy and Materials Management. Each
interfacing module has its own interface queue, which functions as a central
repository for orders. After an order entry user files an order for an
interfacing module, the module files the order on the appropriate interface
queue. It is the responsibility of the appropriate interfacing module to remove
orders from its queue in a timely fashion.

If an interfacing module is down, one of two things happens to orders in its
queue.

     If the Interface to the module is turned off through a routine in the
     Order Entry Module, orders are re-directed to a printer specified in
     the Procedure Dictionary as the Destination for interface.

     If the Interface to the module is not turned off, orders are held
     in the Interface Queue until the receiving module is back on line.


If an order has not arrived at its designated destination in a reasonable time,
Information Systems personnel should be asked to check the Print Queue, the
Delay Queue, and the appropriate Interface Queue.
Entering, Reviewing, and Processing Orders (2)                           Page 9



Controlling User Access to Order Entry Functions

Gaining Access to Multiple Facility OE Databases

If your health care organization consists of more than on facility, the
information stored in a single Order Entry database can be shared among all
facilities. Thus you may gain access to a specific patient's information
without searching several OE databases.

Identifying an Order Entry Database During Sign-On

If you have access to data in more than one OE database, you must identify the
database you with to work with at a pop-up window while signing on to the
system. You can choose the appropriate database from a Lookup containing the
databases you have access to in the MIS User Dictionary.

Determining Who Can Enter Orders

Each of your health care organization's locations can be classified as one of
three types: Inpatient, Outpatient, or Department. You can assign a
location a type in the MIS Location Dictionary. Users in two location types
 can enter orders via the Enter Orders Routine.

In Order Entry, Inpatient and Outpatient locations are further defined as
care areas. A care area is a location where patient care is administered,
for example a nursing floor.

In Order Entry, the term department means any location where tests and
treatments are administered to patients. Examples are the Cardiology,
Laboratory, and Radiology Departments.

Using Dictionaries to Limit Order Processing

You can use the following dictionaries to control which orders may be edited or
cancelled, and which users may process orders:

         *   Category Dictionary -   allows you to specify which order
                                     categories care area users may edit or
                                     cancel after orders are transmitted.

                                     To authorize care area users to edit or
                                     cancel orders in a particular category, you
                                     must respond Y to the PROCESS BY
                                     CARE AREA? prompt in the Category
                                     Dictionary

         *   Access Dictionary -     allows you to specify the Order Entry
                                     categories and functions available to each
                                     user.

                                     To limit the categories from which a user
                                     can place orders, list the authorized
                                     categories at the RESTRICT TO CATEGORIES
Entering, Reviewing, and Processing Orders (2)                         Page 10



                                    prompt. Only these categories appear in a
                                    Category Lookup for users in the access
                                    group.

                                    To give users access to Order Entry
                                    functions, identify a routine in the Access
                                    Dictionary, then select all the functions
                                    to which the users should be authorized to
                                    perform.

For details on setting up dictionaries properly to accommodate your health care
organization's situation, please refer to the Order Entry Dictionary Manual.
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                             Page 11



2.1:    Enter Care Area Orders


The Enter Care Area Orders Routine allows users in Care Areas to enter
orders for tests, treatments, nursing interventions, diets, supplies and other
facility requirements. The routine prompts the user to supply the precise
information that the facility needs to assure efficient and accurate completion
of orders, and speed delivery of order forms to appropriate departments.

Users in Departments cannot use this routine to enter orders; they must use the
Enter Department Orders Routine, which requires entry of the status of the
order.

The orders entered through this routine are verified or unverified
depending on the status assigned to the user in the Access Dictionary:

       * An order entered by a user who is authorized to verify orders is
         verified on entry. At that time, it is transmitted to a printer at the
         department(s) defined in the Procedure Dictionary as the destination
         location(s) for that order. It is printed or placed in queue for
         printing, depending on the printer at the destination location.

       * An order entered by a user who is not authorized to verify orders is
         not transmitted until it is verified by an authorized user through the
         Review and Edit Orders Routine.


Entering Order Sets

Any group of procedures that are commonly ordered together can be entered as an
order set. An example is a standard set of procedures that is performed for
every patient who is scheduled for surgery. All the procedures in a set can be
from one category or, more frequently, there will be procedures from numerous
categories in one set. Order Sets are defined in the Order Set Dictionary.
They are extremely flexible, as procedures can be added, deleted or edited at
the time or order entry.

Entering Series Orders

Orders for procedures that are typically performed several times on a regular
schedule can be ordered in series. You can specify both the time(s) of the day
and the day(s) of the week when such procedures should be performed.
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                            Page 12

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                   Enter Care Area Orders                                   |
|============================================================================================|
|User                                                      A/S              Admit            |
|                                                          Loc              Status           |
|Patient                                                   Rm                                |
|                                                          Bd               Unit #           |
|Attend Dr                                                                                   |
|Order Dr                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                        .1
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                        .1
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
| _                                                                                        _ |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


User                  The name assigned to you in the User Dictionary
                      of the MIS Module appears at the User prompt, both in
                      its mnemonic code and as the full name. You cannot edit
                      this field. The user mnemonic is captured for each
                      transaction you perform, and it appears on various
                      requisitions and reports.


Patient               Use one of the standard methods described below
                      to identify a patient.

                      After you identify the patient, this patient
                      registration information appears on the screen:

                          Age and Sex (A/S)    Admission Date
                          Location             Status
                          Room Number          Unit Number
                          Bed Number           Attending Doctor


                      Depending on how your health care organization sets its
                      system parameters, the mnemonic of the Attending Doctor
                      may default at the Ordering Doctor prompt, since they
                      are usually the same. You can delete the mnemonic for
                      the Ordering Doctor and replace it with another one, if
                      appropriate. If the Ordering Doctor is the same as the
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                          Page 13



                      Attending Doctor, simply press <Enter>, and the full
                      name of the doctor appears beside the mnemonic.


                      Patient Identification Methods

                      The seven patient identification methods include:

                      *    by account number

                      *    by unit number (Enter U#, followed by the unit
                           number.)

                      *    by full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,MIDDLEINITIAL
                           format, using up to 43 characters

                      *    by partial name

                      *    by recalling the last patient entered in the
                           current terminal session.
                           Press <Spacebar>, then <Enter>

                      *        by social security number

                      *    by location (in selected OE routines, described
                           below)

                      NOTE: Restricted users can identify patients only at
                      whose location is associated with the device being used.


                      Identifying Patients by Location

                      In this routine, you can identify patients by location.
                      This provides either a full list of patients or a quick
                      and efficient method of entering and editing orders on
                      several patients at a location.

                      To identify a patient by location:

                      1.   Enter <L> <Spacebar> [mnemonic of any location]
                           <Enter> The unit number and name of the first
                           patient at that location in room/bed order appears.

                      2.   Use <Page Up> and <Page Down> to scroll through the
                           list of patients.

                      3.   Press <Enter> to select a patient.

                      4.   When finished entering information on the patient
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                              Page 14



                               you have selected, file the information <OK> and
                               the next patient in line will pop up at the patient
                               prompt.

                      5.    To Exit the patient prompt while scrolling through
                            press your <Exit> Key.

                      OR

                      1.    Enter <L> <Spacebar> [mnemonic of any location]
                            <Lookup> The user gets a lookup window of all
                            patients that are admitted to that location.

                      2.    The user can then choose the patient by selecting
                            the number for that patient. ie: 1. John Doe.

                      3.    The user can then enter orders on the patient and
                            file those orders.


                      Changing the Patient Name Before Filing Orders
                      If a user enters orders on the wrong patient, rather
                      than exiting and re-entering those orders, the user can
                      enter <previous field> to the Ordering Dr. prompt. At
                      that prompt a window will appear, allowing the user to
                      enter the correct patient.

                      When the user associates a new patient to those orders
                      the system will flag the user if that patient's
                      Administrative Data queries have not been responded to.

                      The user can then press <Enter> to remove the message
                      and continue placing orders. The message appears as a
                      notice not to restrict the user from placing orders but
                      to the user inform that important queries have not been
                      answered.


Order Dr              Depending on how your health care organization
                      sets system parameters:

                      1) this field is blank

                           Enter the mnemonic from the Provider Dictionary that
                           defines the doctor who is ordering this procedure. A
                           Lookup is available.

                      2) the attending doctor is the default response

                           If the Ordering Doctor is different from the
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                             Page 15



                          Attending Doctor, delete the mnemonic for the
                          Attending Doctor. Enter a mnemonic from the Provider
                          Dictionary that defines the doctor who is ordering
                          this procedure. A Lookup is available. When you
                          enter the mnemonic, the full name of the doctor
                          appears beside it.


Category             Enter the mnemonic of the category associated with
                     the procedure you are ordering. A Lookup is available.

                     Note:     In addition to the standard Lookup, you can get
                               a Lookup listed alphabetically by mnemonic.
                               Enter a letter or letters, then press Lookup.

                      When you identify a category, an indicator arrow appears
                      at the left of that category. Any defined prompts
                      specified for that category appear in the lower section
                      of the screen and the cursor moves to the Procedure
                      prompt.

                      Each time you enter an order, the indicator arrow moves
                      to the left of that order. You can scroll up and down
                      through orders by using the UP and DOWN arrows; the
                      indicator arrow scrolls. You can edit or delete any
                      part of the order with the arrow next to it.

                      Ordering from Restricted Categories

                      Your health care organization can limit users to
                      ordering from specific categories by using the
                      RESTRICT TO CATEGORIES prompt in the Access
                      Dictionary.

                      If your user group has limited access to the Order Entry
                      categories, the following message appears when you
                      attempt to enter an order in an unauthorized category:

                                   This entry is unavailable.

                      Press <Lookup> for a list of categories to which you are
                      authorized.

                      Wildcard Lookup

                      A Wildcard Lookup allows you to enter a word or partial
                      word, and view all procedures that contain the word or
                      phrase. To perform a wildcard lookup at the Category
                      prompt, enter *characters<Lookup>. The procedures
                      containing the phrase or character string are presented
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                              Page 16



                      along with their category and procedure mnemonic. For
                      example, *Diet<Lookup> could present a list as follows:

                      Procedure                        (Category)   [Mnemonic]

                     1   American Diabetic Assoc.      (DIET)       [ADA]
                     2   Dietary Assessment            (PC)         [DIETASSESS]


                      Entering Order Sets

                      You can indicate at the Category prompt that you want to
                      place an Order Set. Enter a slash (/) followed by the
                      mnemonic given to the Order Set in the Order Set
                      Dictionary.

                      Order category limits apply to order sets as well as
                      individual orders. If you enter an order set, you can
                      only enter procedures in your authorized categories.


Procedure             Enter the mnemonic of the procedure associated with
                      the specified category. A Lookup of procedures in the
                      selected category is available.

                      The standard Procedure Lookup allows users to check
                      multiple procedures at once using the Right <Ctrl> key
                      and then pressing <Ok>. Once procedures have been
                      selected, users may enter a default priority, date, and
                      time for all procedures selected.

                      NOTE:    In addition to the standard Lookup, you can
                               use one of the following methods:

                                              Full           Partial
                      Lookup Method           Lookup         Lookup

                      alphabetically by       <Lookup>       [chars]<Lookup>
                      procedure name                         (e.g., EL<Lookup>)

                      numerically by          #<Lookup>      #[num]<Lookup>
                      procedure number                       (e.g., #500<Lookup>)

                      Wildcard                *char<Lookup>
                                              (e.g.,*Holter<Lookup>)

                      Wildcard Lookup

                      A wildcard Lookup allows users to select a procedure
                      using a word within the procedure. For example, if you
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                          Page 17



                      want to select a diabetic diet, you may do a wildcard
                      Lookup using the word or part of the word "diabetic".

                      To perform this Lookup, enter an asterisk, the partial
                      or full word and then press the Lookup key. For
                      example,

                      *DIAB<Lookup>

                      All procedures containing the above character string are
                      presented to the user.


                      When you enter a mnemonic, the full name of the
                      procedure appears beside it; and the default priority,
                      quantity (if any), and print-here (if any) responses set
                      up in the Procedure Dictionary appear at the appropriate
                      prompts at the right. You can delete the default
                      responses and enter new ones, if appropriate.

                      The hospital-defined prompts for the procedure also
                      appear in the lower section of the screen, below the
                      hospital-defined prompts for the category.

                      Entering Nursing Interventions

                      After you identify a nursing intervention, OE checks the
                      response to the EDIT TEXT prompt in the Nursing
                      Intervention Dictionary.

                      If that prompt is Y, the following message appears:

                                   Edit supplemental text?

                      After you respond Y, a text editing screen displays
                      the supplemental text entered for the intervention in
                      the Nursing Module. If necessary, edit the text to suit
                      a specific patient. The revised text appears in Nursing
                      when the orders is retrieved.

                      You may also enter specific directions for the Nursing
                      Intervention, or edit the default directions from the
                      Nursing Module. After choosing the intervention press
                      Shift and Right Arrow. The system will display the
                      Directions Multiple screen and allow the user to
                      enter/edit directions for this particular intervention.

                      Billing for Nursing Interventions

                      After a Nursing user documents an intervention that is
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                           Page 18



                      defined to generate a charge, the transaction
                      information appears in the next billing batch. OE users
                      need not manually enter separate charges for these
                      transactions. The transaction also appears on the
                      Billing List Report for the department associated with
                      the intervention's category.

                      Entering Series Orders

                      To place a Series Order, enter a slash (/), followed by
                      the mnemonic of the procedure. A Lookup to the
                      Procedure Dictionary is available.

                      Entering Daily Orders

                      To place a Daily Order, enter a dollar sign ($) followed
                      by the mnemonic for the procedure. A Lookup to the
                      Procedure Dictionary is available.


Priority              Enter or edit this order's priority:   S for Stat,
                      U for Urgent, or R for Routine.

                      For Stock-type orders, the cursor stops at this prompt
                      only if you defined a default priority for this
                      procedure in the OE Procedure Dictionary. If a default
                      value appears, you can change it.

                      For Diet-type and Payment-type orders, the cursor
                      bypasses this prompt.


Qty                   The cursor stops here only if the QUANTITY
                      prompt is set up for this procedure in the Procedure
                      Dictionary. You can enter the quantity of the procedure
                      to be ordered or, if a default quantity set up in the
                      Procedure Dictionary appears, you can edit it.


Date T+               Enter the service date for this procedure. Press
                      <Enter> to accept the default response T+ and schedule
                      the procedure for the current date. When entering
                      multiple orders for the same date, press <Get> to copy
                      the date from the order on the previous line.

                      Entering Past and Future Dates

                      Your health care organization may have predefined date
                      limits. For example, some procedures may be ordered up
                      to 365 days in advance, or up to 30 days in the past.
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                           Page 19



                      The service date limitations are defined in the Order
                      Entry parameters.

                      Enter T+[number] to indicate a future date that conforms
                      to the future date limit.

                      Enter T-[number] to indicate a past date that conforms
                      to the past date limit. Tests may not be ordered for a
                      past date in the Enter Orders routine. They must be
                      entered in the Enter Department Orders routine.

                      Press the <Get> key to recall the last date entered.


Time                  Enter a service time for this procedure.

                      * Enter N(ow) to capture the time the session if filed

                      * Enter a specific time in 24-hour HHMM format

                      * Press <Get> to copy the time from the previous order

                      If no time is entered, the order is entered for the date
                      shown at the left with no specified time. In this case,
                      a service time is not available for monitoring on a
                      review screen.

                      If a time is not specified for a future order for a
                      category set to Hold Future Orders, that order will go
                      to the bottom of the Print Queue.

                      If you enter a past service time, and your system's
                      DISPLAY 'TIME IS PAST' MESSAGE parameter is set to
                      Y, the "Time is Past. OK?" message appears. You
                      can then verify that the past service time is correct,
                      or return to the TIME prompt and edit it.

                      Dietary Orders

                      Enter the abbreviation for the meal at which the diet
                      should start instead of entering a time. Meals are
                      defined as:

                               B   - Breakfast
                               L   - Lunch
                               D   - Dinner


                      Orders for Held Meals
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                           Page 20



                      An warning message will display if a diet is tried to be
                      entered for a meal that is currently on hold. The
                      message will display that the meal is on hold and the
                      release time. This message can be ignored and a diet
                      can be entered if desired.


Here                  The cursor stops here only if a Here prompt is
                      set up for this procedure in the Procedure Dictionary.
                      If a default response of Y or N is set up in the
                      Procedure Dictionary, that appears here also. Your
                      response determines whether or not order forms for the
                      procedure are printed at the usual locations.

                      Enter N if you want them printed at the usual
                      locations defined in the Procedure Dictionary.

                      Enter Y if you want all order forms to be
                      printed at the ordering location. If order forms for
                      this procedure are usually printed at four different
                      locations, all four of them will be printed at the
                      ordering location, or "Here". This feature is sometimes
                      useful if the order forms ordinarily go to departments
                      that are not open 24 hours, or to float staff, and need
                      to be hand-delivered.

                      NOTE:    If the terminal for the ordering location
                               is managed to multiple locations, the forms
                               print at the printer with the first mnemonic
                               alphabetically.

                      Printing Orders at a Patient's Permanent Location

                      If a user enters orders for a patient while the patient
                      is at a temporary location, such as an operating room,
                      the orders can be printed either the Permanent or
                      Temporary locations.

                      You specify whether orders print, and where they
                      print at the DESTINATION prompt in the Procedure
                      Dictionary. To print orders at the patient's current
                      location, whether temporary or permanent, enter PAT
                      at the DESTINATION prompt.

                      To cause orders to print to the patient's permanent
                      location, enter PATP at the DESTINATION prompt.



Customer-Defined Prompts
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                             Page 21




The cursor moves to the customer-defined prompts in the lower section of the
screen. Default responses may appear in some customer-defined queries under
the following conditions:

         *   the same prompt appears in the Enter/Edit Administrative Data
             Routine, and a user responded to the prompt in that routine.

         *   you entered an order in the same category earlier in the current
             order entry session. In this case, your response to the prompt
             during order entry appears as the default response

In either case, if you edit the prompt in this routine, any earlier responses
to the prompt remain intact.

If you leave any required prompts unanswered, a message reminds you that a
response is required. Press <Enter> to return the cursor to the first
unanswered required field.

Duplicate Orders

If you try to file a second order for the same procedure for the same patient,
for a time that is less than the Duplicate Order Hours set up for that
procedure in the Procedure Dictionary, a Duplicate Order notice appears. The
notice shows the category and procedure of the previous order, the date and
time that it was entered, its priority, and the ordering doctor. This message
also appears:

                       Reason for duplicate order

If you want to file the duplicate order, enter a reason here, in up to 60
characters of free text. This message appears:

                       File Verified   or   File Unverified

(The exact wording of the message depends on the access of the user entering
the order.) Enter Y if you want to enter the order, N if you do not.

If you enter the order, its duplicate status is indicated on the screen of the
Review Orders Routines. The letters DUP appear beside the order, and the
clinical justification for the duplicate order also appears at the bottom of
the screen.

If you do not want to file the order, press <Enter>. A notice appears,
giving the category and procedure of the order and stating:

                       DUPLICATE REASON is req'd


Redundant Order check for LAB, MIC and BBK orders

When you file an order for categories interfacing to LAB, MIC, or BBK,    it is
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                              Page 22



checked against all other orders being entered and any orders for the patient
for the same service date previously filed. If the order being placed is for
the same procedure, priority, date and time as a previous order the order will
be considered redundant, and the following message appears:

n) LAB - K:   REDUNDANT order - must change date, time, or priority.

Where n is the number of the order just entered, and LAB - K indicates
the redundant category and procedure. You cannot file the order until you
change one of the fields mentioned.


Entering Series Orders

You can indicate at the PROCEDURE prompt that you want to place a Series
Order. Enter a slash (/) followed by the mnemonic for the procedure, from the
Procedure Dictionary. The cursor moves to the PRIority prompt, and the
full name of the procedure appears on the screen, along with the default
priority, quantity (if applicable) and date. In addition, the customer-defined
queries for the procedure appear in the lower section of the screen.

The following prompts specific to a Series Order also appear at the bottom of
the screen.

DIRECTIONS               Enter information that describes the schedule on
                         which you want the procedures to be performed. To
                         specify directions, you can use:

                          *   one or more mnemonics from the Directions Dictionary

                          *   one or a combination of formats such as BID for
                              twice a day, or Q4H for every four hours.

                          *   free text preceded by a ".", such as .AS TOLERATED


STOP DATE                Enter the date on which you want the procedure to
                         stop, using a T combination or the standard format
                         (MM/DD/YY or, outside the US, DD/MM/YY). A response to
                         this prompt is required. The Start Date is specified at
                         the Service Date prompt above.


STOP TIME                Enter the time at which you want the procedure to
                         stop, in standard 24-hour HHMM format. You specify the
                         Start Time at the Service Time prompt above.

COUNT                    This is a display field only. The total number of
                         procedures called for by your directions appears in this
                         field.

                         NOTE:   The maximum number of series orders that the
                                 system will accept for any procedure is 99.
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                            Page 23



                               If following your series directions would call
                               for more than 99 orders, the system will limit
                               the orders to the first 99. The count will
                               reflect this fact.

Nursing Orders

You may order Nursing Interventions directly from Enter Orders. The interface
between Order Entry and Nursing is established by interfacing categories to
Nursing as well as defining order fields in the Nursing Intervention
Dictionary.

Once the correct fields are defined, Nursing Interventions ordered in Enter
Orders interface from Order Entry to Nursing along with the associated
directions and supplemental text. Interventions interfaced from Order Entry
file under the Additional Interventions section in the Enter/Edit Care Plan and
Process Interventions routines.

Interventions within Nursing may have multiple directions. The Enter Orders
routine allows you to enter these directions. Once the procedure level has
been defined, press <Shift><right arrow> to define directions in the following
screen:

|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|   Date     Time Directions                                                    |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Date                  Enter/edit the start date for the directions, using
                      the standard date format (e.g., T+1).


Time                   Enter/edit the start time for the directions.

                      To enter the start time of the first shift (as defined
                      in the Shift Dictionary), enter 0000.


Directions            Enter/edit the frequency of the directions for the
                      interventions, using one of the following:
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                               Page 24




                           *   one or a combination of system formats (e.g.,
                               Q4H, MoWeFr)

                           *   a mnemonic from the MIS Directions Dictionary
                               (e.g., BID)

                               Lookup:   MIS Directions Dictionary

                           *   a period (.) followed by free text (e.g.,
                               .AS TOLERATED)

                      If no directions are associated to the order, then
                      default directions will be setup according to the
                      intervention dictionary.

The Intervention Dictionary also determines whether you may enter or edit
Nursing Supplemental Text. If the Nursing Intervention Dictionary is defined
to allow users to edit this text via Order Entry, you are prompted to edit
supplemental text upon entering a Nursing Order. If default Intervention
Supplemental Text is already defined in the Intervention Dictionary, the text
defaults. In addition, any text entered or edited interfaces to the Nursing
Module.

Pharmacy Orders

In the Order Entry Parameters, Health Care Organizations may determine whether
Pharmacy Orders are entered via Order Entry and interfaced to NPR Pharmacy.
Health Care Organizations may define whether users are brought into the NPR
Pharmacy Enter Medication Orders routine directly from Enter Orders. Once the
Pharmacy category has been entered, users are brought directly into the
appropriate Enter Medication Orders screen in Pharmacy.

The access level each user has when in the Pharmacy Enter Orders routine is
determined in the Pharmacy Access Dictionary. Users may be restricted to edit,
view, or have no access to certain prompts. Once the required information has
been entered, as defined in NPR Pharmacy, the user is returned to the Order
Entry Enter Orders screen. The RX, Dose, Routine, Sig, and Sch, default into
the Procedure query section of the screen.


Order Signing

In the MEDITECH system, any user can enter clinical orders, even if the user
lacks authority to sign them. As a result, ward clerks can enter verbal or
phone orders, and interns can enter orders that require physician signature.
Many health care organizations' policies require that such an order be signed
by an authorized provider within 24 to 48 hours of entry.

The electronic order signing feature includes the following capabilities:

         * The Order Entry parameters determine the highest level of signature
Enter Care Area Orders (2.1)                                          Page 25



           authority for a health care organization. For example, the highest
           level might be defined as 5. In addition, the parameters determine
           the group response query which should be answered upon order entry
           to define how an order was entered (e.g. verbal order, faxed order,
           phone order, etc)

         * When an order requiring signature is placed and the "How Ordered"
           query is answered, the users required to sign the order are
           compiled based on the order's category. For example, if a category
           is defined to have the Ordering and Attending Doctor's signatures,
           these users for the order are listed as signers.

         * To view the signers for an order, press the Right <Ctrl> key. A
           screen appears that lists the users who are required to sign this
           order. You may add additional users to sign in this screen.

         * During order entry, the system checks the sign on user to see if he
           or she is authorized to sign the order. An MIS Parameter then
           determines whether or not the user must enter a PIN number to sign
           the order. If the sign on user is not authorized, the system
           places the order on a queue to be signed later by the designated
           providers, in the Category Dictionary, or an alternate signer.

         * One signature for the order must be at least the signature level
           defined in the Procedure Dictionary. If the Procedure Dictionary
           does not have the signature level defined for the procedure, the
           signature level defined for the category takes precedence.

         * Unsigned orders appear in the Process/Sign Provider's Orders, Sign
           Orders by Location, and List Unsigned Orders routines.
Review Orders (by order date) (2.2)                                      Page 26



2.2:   Review Orders (by order date)


Use this routine to review and edit all orders entered for a patient on a
specific date. After you identify the patient, the screen displays all the
orders that were entered for the patient on the date you specified. (If you
want to deal with orders for a patient by service date, use the Review
Orders (by service date) Routine.)

The list of orders includes the date and time when it was ordered, the ordering
physician, the user who ordered it, the order number, category, procedure,
current status, users monogram, as well as the service date and time.
Physicians have the ability to place orders directly through PCI. These orders
also display in the Review Orders routines. If a physician bypassed any
required fields while placing an order, that order has a status of UNV PHY,
indicating an unverified physician order.

You can identify orders for individual procedures and then, as appropriate:

                       *   enter additional orders
                       *   amend existing orders
                       *   cancel existing orders
                       *   print existing orders
                       *   verify existing orders (if you are an authorized user)
                       *   view results of existing orders
                       *   display detail of existing orders

To handle more than one order at a time, you can check mark several orders to
perform a function on all of them. You can also enter additional orders from
this routine for a patient whose orders you are reviewing.

Reviewing Orders From Other Modules

You can use this routine to review orders placed in Order Entry or in any of
the following modules: LAB, RAD, BBK, and MIC. After a user in another module
edits or updates an order, the Review Orders screen reflects the edit.
Additionally, if you edit or update an order from another module in OE, the
edit transmits to the other module.

For example, assume that a lab technician enters a lab test via the Enter/Edit
Requisitions Routine in the LAB module. As soon as the test is filed, OE users
can review it via the Review Orders routines. If an OE user requests to cancel
the order, the request is reflected in LAB.

The OE Effect on Cancelling or Uncancelling Orders in an Interfaced Module

Occasionally, you may place an interfaced order for a procedure which must be
cancelled after the order transmits. For example, you might place a LAB order
for a sodium test, but when the LAB user attempts to perform the test, the
patient has already been discharged. The LAB user cancels the order via the
LAB Module's Cancel Specimen function, and the system updates the corresponding
order's status in OE to CNC.
Review Orders (by order date) (2.2)                                    Page 27




In the Review Orders Routine, when you move the highlight bar to the cancelled
order, a message explaining the order's cancellation appears at the bottom of
the screen.

LAB users can also uncancel an order if a user processed a cancellation
erroneously, or the patient becomes available. If a LAB user uncancels a
procedure, and processes a specimen, the corresponding OE order reverts to the
correct status. To continue the above example, if the LAB user performs the
sodium test, the specimen uncancels in LAB, and the system updates the
corresponding order's status in OE to IPR or CMP.

You can use the Order Audit Trail Routine to monitor all order events, both in
OE and in interfacing modules. For more information, please refer to that
routine's documentation.

Reviewing Physician Orders Placed from the PCI Module

Your health care organization can set up its system to allow physicians to
place individual orders or personalized order sets from the PCI Module. If you
allow physician order entry from PCI, you can review and perform functions on
physician-entered orders via this routine. The system treats physician orders
like standard orders unless the physician bypasses any required fields while
placing the order. Such orders appear in this routine with a status of UNV
PHY, indicating an unverified physician order.

Tracking and Verifying Physician-Entered Orders

You can edit and update physician orders like standard orders. By tracking
unverified orders, you can quickly identify orders with incomplete information,
and update them. To identify physician orders with incomplete information, use
the List Unverified Orders Routine to get a list of all a patient's unverified
orders. An asterisk (*) beside the ordering doctor's mnemonic indicates that
the doctor placed the unverified order from PCI.
Review Orders (by order date) (2.2)                                       Page 28

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Review Orders (by order date)                                |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Category                                                  A/S              Admit            |
|Patient                                                   Loc              Status           |
|Attend Dr                                                 Rm                                |
|Order Date                                                Bd               Unit #           |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                  2
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                  2
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Category             You have the following two choices:

                      *   Identify a category for which you want to review
                          orders for a patient. For example, to review all
                          Cardiology orders, enter CARD (or the appropriate
                          mnemonic).

                      *   Press <Enter> to bypass this prompt and avoid
                          restricting the list of orders to a specific
                          category.




Patient               Use one of the standard methods to identify a
                      patient.

                      There are several patient identification methods:
Review Orders (by order date) (2.2)                                   Page 29



                      *    by account number

                      *    by social security number

                      *    by unit number (Enter U#, followed by the unit
                           number.)

                      *    by full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,MIDDLEINITIAL
                           format, using up to 43 characters

                      *    by partial name

                      *    by recalling the last patient entered in the
                           current terminal session.
                           Press <Spacebar>, then <Enter>

                      *    by location

                      NOTE: Restricted users can identify patients whose
                      locations are associated with their devices.

                      Identifying Patients by Location
                      In this routine, you can identify patients by location.
                      This provides a quick and efficient method of entering
                      and editing orders on several patients at a location.

                      To identify a patient by location:

                      1.   Enter <L> <Spacebar> [mnemonic of any location] The
                           unit number and name of the first patient at that
                           location in room/bed order appears.

                      2.   Use <Prev> and <Next> to scroll through the list of
                           patients.

                      3.   Press <Enter> to select a patient.

                      Moving to Another Patient After Finishing with a Patient

                      If you select a patient, but wish to move to another
                      patient without saving anything, press <Exit>. The next
                      patient at that location appears.


Order Date            Today's date is the default response. Press
                      <Enter> to review and/or edit orders that were entered
                      today. To review or edit orders entered on an earlier
                      date, replace today's date with the desired date format
                      or a T combination. You cannot enter a future date.
Review Orders (by order date) (2.2)                                        Page 30



                        Dietary Orders-Concurrent Diets

                        When entering a new dietary order, you may want to view
                        the patient's primary and concurrent diets. To gain the
                        desired information:

                        1.   Identify the Dietary category and patient.

                        2.   Enter C at ORDER DATE for a list of all the
                             patient's current diets.



After you identify a patient and order date, this registration information
appears on the screen:

          *   Age and Sex           *    Admission Date
          *   Location              *    Admission Status
          *   Room Number           *    Unit Number
          *   Bed Number            *    Attending Doctor

In addition to the registration information, all orders entered on the
specified date are available for review and edit. If you entered a category at
the CATEGORY prompt, the list includes only orders from the specified category.

The orders are displayed in the center of the screen, with the order having the
earliest order time appearing at the top of the list. Six orders are
visible at a time.

Reviewing a Different Date's Orders

With the current date's orders visible on the screen, you can move backwards a
day at a time, reviewing each day's orders for the selected patient. For
example, after reviewing today's orders, you could look at yesterday's orders,
or the previous day's orders, etc.

To review a previous date's orders:

1.   Press <Exit>.

2.   Exit? appears.   Enter Y to exit.

3.   If the patient has any orders for a previous date, and in the selected
     category, if any, they appear.

4.   Repeat the above steps to move backwards in time, reviewing the patient's
     orders a day at a time.

If no previous orders exist for a patient, the cursor remains at the Order Date
prompt on the Review Orders screen.
Review Orders (by order date) (2.2)                                      Page 31



This has been changed from handling only the orders' duplicate flags, to now
handling that as only a 'D' and also an 'I' to indicate pacs images attached.


Performing a function

To perform a function, type in the two leading letters of the application.
These letters should be highlighted. You can act on one order at a time -- the
one with the highlighted bar through it. Or you can act on several at a
time, by "marking" them as described below. After you mark the order(s) you
want to act on, select the processing function you want, then press <Enter>.
Only marked orders are acted upon.

NOTES:   If one or more orders are marked, the highlighted order is acted
         upon only if it is also marked.


Marking an order

One order

Highlight the order of interest, using the UP and DOWN arrows. Press the Right
Ctrl Key. A check appears in the leftmost column beside the highlighted order,
and the message at the top right of the screen reads:

                        1\/ of N(umber of orders)

Continue marking as many orders as you like. A check appears beside each
marked order, and the message at the top right of the screen tells you how many
orders are checked.

All orders at once

If no orders are marked, you can mark them all at once by simultaneously
pressing <Shift> and the Right Ctrl key.

Removing the mark from one or all orders

To remove the check from one marked order, highlight it and press the Right
Ctrl key. To remove the checks from all the marked orders, simultaneously
press <Shift> and the Right Ctrl key.


Description of Functions

Enter              When you select EO, the Enter Orders Screen appears, allowing
Orders             you to enter further orders for the patient whose orders you
                   are reviewing.

Enter/Edit         To enter or edit the patient's Administrative Data, select EA.
Administrative     This allows you to change or enter query, height, weight,
Data               tray hold, temporary location, and condition information. No
Review Orders (by order date) (2.2)                                     Page 32



                orders need to be selected from Review Orders to execute this
                function.

Amend            When you select AO, an Amend Orders screen appears, displaying
Order            the first of the orders you marked for editing.

Cancel          When you select CO, you are prompted for cancellation reason.
Order           This prompt displays the query entered in the OE parameters.
                This query can be any type you deem appropriate, although
                Comment, Group, or Optional are the most likely choices.
                Regardless of the response type chosen, response to this query
                continues to be required.

Print            When you select PO, this message appears:
Order
                      Print on:

                Enter the mnemonic of the printer at which you want the order
                to be printed.

Renew            If an order is defined as renewable in the Procedure
Order            Dictionary, you may select RN to renew the order.

Sign            Required signatures may be defined in the Category Dictionary
Order           as well as the Enter Orders routine. If signatures are
                required, you may select SO to sign the order if you are
                authorized to electronically sign the order.

Verify          When you select VO, you may verify any unverified
Order           orders as long as you are authorized to do so in the
                Access Dictionary.

View            When you select VA, you are brought into the View Appointment
Appt            routine in PCI which allows you to view appointments from the
                NPR Scheduling module for this patient.

View            When you select VR, the Patient Care Inquiry Option is called
Result          to allow you to view the result of the highlighted order(s).
                You would usually want to view results only for orders with a
                status of Completed.

Print           When you select PR, you have the ability to print the results
Result          of the order as they appear in the Patient Care Inquiry
                module.

Display         When you select DO, the order record screen appears. Note
Order           for LAB orders, when applicable, the lab requisition and
                specimen numbers display.
Amend Order Function (2.2.1)                                              Page 33



2.2.1:   Amend Order Function


Use this function to edit orders.   You may edit orders from this routine under
the following circumstances:

          *   If the category containing the selected procedure has a Y at
              the PROCESS BY CARE AREA? prompt in the Category Dictionary.

          *   If the category has a Y at the HOLD FUTURE ORDERS? prompt
              in the Category Dictionary.

          *   if the procedure is at a status of either UNV or VER.

If you are allowed to process orders in the selected category, when you enter
AO, an Edit Orders screen appears, displaying the first markes order.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                        EDIT ORDERS                                         |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|User                                                                                        |
|                                                                                            |
|Patient                                                   A/S              Admit            |
|Attend Dr                                                 Loc              Status           |
|                                                          Rm                                |
|                                                          Bd               Unit #           |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                 ---Service---                              |
| Order Dr     Category    Procedure   Order No   Date     Time Pri Qty Status Here          |
|                                                                   .8                       |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


You can edit these elements of an unverified or verified order:

          *   ordering doctor
          *   service date and time (meal for diets)
          *   priority (not applicable for diets)
          *   responses to queries associated with the order
Amend Order Function (2.2.1)                                             Page 34



You can also edit the following elements depending on the Procedure Dictionary
specifications:

          *   quantity (not applicable for diets)
          *   whether requisitions are printed at the usual locations or at the
              printer associated with the ordering terminal.


Once you have completed editing the first order, this message appears:

                 File?

Enter Y or N.

If you enter N, the cursor returns to the editing screen for further
editing.

If you enter Y, and you have marked only one order for editing, the cursor
returns to the main Process Orders screen.

If you enter Y, and you have marked more than one order for editing, this
message appears:

                               Edit Which Order?

                               Current Order
                               Next Order
                               Edit All Orders
                               eXit

                               Selection


NOTE:   You cannot edit an order that has been cancelled or transmitted to
        an anciallary department. If you you try to do so, one of these
        messages appears:

                 Can't edit a cancelled order
                Can't edit a transmitted order
Cancel Order Function (2.2.2)                                            Page 35



2.2.2:   Cancel Order Function


You may cancel orders from this routine if the category containing the selected
procedure has a Y at the PROCESS BY CARE AREA? prompt in the Category
Dictionary. Also, you may cancel an order for a future date if the category
has a Y at the HOLD FUTURE ORDERS? prompt in the Category Dictionary.

If your system permits care area users to process orders, when you enter CO,
for Cancel Order, the system checks whether any of the selected orders are
eligible for cancellation.

If no selected order meets cancellation eligibility requirements, the following
message appears:

               None of the selected orders can be cancelled.

If any orders meet cancellation criteria, you receive a message asking for a
cancellation reason.


Entering a Cancellation Reason

The cancellation message is a query that you set up at the REASON FOR CANCEL
prompt in your OE parameters. You can define a query as one of several types,
with each type having a specific allowable response. The most commonly used
query types and allowable responses are listed below:

          Comment Type - allows for up to a 60 character free text response.

          Group Response - allows user to choose from a list of
                           customer-defined responses.

          Optional - allows user to choose from a list of customer-defined
                     responses or enter free text.

NOTE:    To ensure that your REASON FOR CANCEL parameter is setup
         appropriately, contact your MEDITECH applications consultant.

After you enter a cancellation reason, if the order is not transmitted, the
status of the order changes to CNC and this message appears at the bottom
of the screen:

                    CANCELLED: (reason for cancellation)

Such an order will not be transmitted, nor will it appear on any reports.

If the orders is transmitted, however, this message appears at the bottom
of the screen:

                CANCEL REQUESTED: (reason for cancellation)
Cancel Order Function (2.2.2)                                         Page 36



The status of the order changes, with CNC? appearing beside the previous
status. Requisitions for the order, flagged with a ***REQUESTED
CANCELLATION*** notice, are printed at all locations at which the original
requisition was printed.


LAB or RAD Orders: Requesting Cancellations After the Order is filed in the
Interfacing Module

If you file a cancellation request for a LAB or RAD order, but the order
continues to be processed by the interfacing module after the cancellation
request is filed, a Cancellation Request Denied output format prints at your
ordering location with the following message:

                           CANC. REQUEST DENIED.



Cancelling Order Sets and Series Orders

If you request to cancel an order that is part of an order set or series order,
one of the following messages appears:

 [cat mnemonic][proc mnemonic] is part of an order set. Cancel all orders?
[cat mnemonic][proc mnemonic] is part of a series order. Cancel all orders?

Respond Y to cancel all eligible orders.   Respond N to cancel only
the selected order(s).
Display Order Function (2.2.3)                                            Page 37



2.2.3:   Display Order Function


When you enter DO, the Order Record Screen for the selected order appears
with the following information:

     *   Patient Information

         -   name
         -   account number
         -   unit number

     *   Procedure Information

         -   ordering doctor                   -   date and time of order update
         -   date and time of order entry      -   service date and time
         -   mnemonic of verifying user        -   priority
         -   category name                     -   quantity
         -   procedure mnemonic and name       -   lab requisition number
         -   order number and status           -   specimen number (if LAB order)
         -   mnemonic of updating user         -   cancel information
         -   name, number and status of
             associated report (if applicable)
Enter/Edit Administrative Data Function (2.2.4)                        Page 38



2.2.4:   Enter/Edit Administrative Data Function


When you enter EA, the Enter/Edit Administrative Data Screen for the
specified patient appears. To enter or edit the patient's administrative data,
press <Enter>. The following screen appears:

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Enter/Edit Administrative Data                               |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                              .0 A/S              Admit              |
|Temporary Location                                      Loc              Status             |
|                                                        Rm                                  |
|Hold Tray: Date           Meal          e               Bd               Unit #             |
|Condition                        Visitors Allowed                                           |
|Cmt                                                             Ht               in
|
|Visit Reason                                                   Wt          8    oz         g|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+

For more information, see the documentation for the Enter/Edit Administrative
Data Routine.
Enter Order Function (2.2.5)                                           Page 39



2.2.5:   Enter Order Function


When you enter EO, the Enter Orders Screen appears, allowing you to enter
further orders for the patient whose orders you are reviewing.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                   Enter Care Area Orders                                   |
|============================================================================================|
|User                                                      A/S              Admit            |
|                                                          Loc              Status           |
|Patient                                                   Rm                                |
|                                                          Bd               Unit #           |
|Attend Dr                                                                                   |
|Order Dr                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                        .1
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                        .1
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
| _                                                                                        _ |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+

For more information please see the documentation for the Enter Care Area
Orders routine.
Print Order Function (2.2.6)                                            Page 40



2.2.6:   Print Order Function


When you enter PO, this message appears:

                                  Print on:

Enter the mnemonic of the printer at which you want the order to be printed.

NOTE:    Orders printed through this routine do not look as they do on a
         requisition for the order, but as they do on the Edit Orders screen.
         Not only is the format different from the requisition; none of the text
         specified in the category or Procedure Dictionaries appears on the
         order printed through this routine.

         If you print orders for nursing interventions via this routine, the
         printed order includes supplemental text.
Print Results Function (2.2.7)                                        Page 41



2.2.7:   Print Results Function


Upon selecting the PR function, the user will be prompted with the
following message:

                                  Print on:

Enter the mnemonic of the printer at which the results should be printed.   A
Lookup into the Device Dictionary is also available.
Renew Orders Function (2.2.8)                                          Page 42



2.2.8:   Renew Orders Function


Procedures may be defined as renewable in the Procedure Dictionary. If a
procedure is defined as renewable, upon selecting the RN function, a prompt
displays asking if you would like to renew the order.

If in the Procedure Dictionary, the procedure is defined to require signature,
you are prompted for their PIN number or password, depending on how you are
defined in the MIS Module.

Users are also allowed to check off multiple orders and renew a batch. This is
done by checking off orders. There is a notation in the top right hand corner
of the screen indicating how many orders are checked to be renewed.
Sign Orders Function (2.2.9)                                           Page 43



2.2.9:   Sign Orders Function


If an order is defined to require signatures, the SO function accesses the
Sign Orders routine allowing users to electronically sign an order. Once
signed the sign date and time appears next to the user who signed the order.
Verify Order Function (2.2.10)                                          Page 44



2.2.10:   Verify Order Function


When you enter VO, the system checks whether the selected orders are
eligible to be verified, and if so, this message appears:

                                  Verify order?

Enter Y to verify the marked order(s). The status changes from UNV to
VER and the order is enither transmitted or placed in the queue for
transmission.

Enter N if you do not want to verify the order(s).

NOTES:    Only users who are authorized in the Access Dictionary of the
          Order Entry Module to place verified orders can verify orders. If an
          unauthorized user tries to verify an order, this message appears at
          the bottom of the screen:

                            Not an authorized user

          You can only verify orders that are unverified. If you try to
          verify an order that has already been verified, this message appears:

                   Only unverified orders can be verified
View Appointment Function (2.2.11)                                    Page 45



2.2.11:   View Appointment Function


If the procedure is generated based on a Scheduled Appointment in the
Scheduling Module, users have the ability to view information about the
appointment. Choosing VA for the View Appointment function will bring the
user into the Scheduling Module to view information about the associated
appointment.

If there is no appointment associated to a procedure the following message will
appear when selecting VA:

                           Cannot view appointment
                           REASON: No appointment selected
View Results Function (2.2.12)                                         Page 46



2.2.12:   View Results Function


Upon selecting the VR function, you are brought into the Patient Care
Inquiry Option which allows you to view the result of the highlighted order(s).
Typically, users want to view results only for orders with a status of
Complete. If the order is not yet Complete or Resulted users will be brought
into the Order Record screen.

The appearance of the screen varies with the category of the procedure being
viewed. For more information, see the User Manual for the MEDITECH Patient
Care Inquiry Option.
Review Orders (by service date) (2.3)                                    Page 47



2.3:   Review Orders (by service date)


Use this routine to review and edit all orders entered for a patient for a
specific service date. After you identify the patient, the screen displays
all the orders that were entered for him/her on the date you specified and
subsequent dates.

This routine is similar to the Review Orders (by order date) Routine but, while
that routine displays orders by date of order, this routine displays them
by date of service. This routine offers the best method for nursing
personnel to review orders to be performed on an upcoming shift, or to review
future orders.

The list of orders will include the date and time which it was ordered, the
ordering physician, the user who ordered it, the order number, category,
procedure, current status, users monogram, as well as the service date and
time. Physicians have the ability to place orders directly through PCI. These
orders will also display in the Review Orders routines. If a physician bypassed
any required fields while placing an order, that order has a status of UNV
PHY, indicating an unverified physician order.

You can identify orders for individual procedures and then, as appropriate:

                       *   enter additional orders
                       *   amend existing orders
                       *   cancel existing orders
                       *   print existing orders
                       *   verify existing orders (if you are an authorized user)
                       *   view results of existing orders
                       *   display detail of existing orders

To handle more than one order at a time, you can "mark" several orders to
perform a function on all of them. You can also enter additional orders from
this routine for a patient whose orders you are reviewing.
Review Orders (by service date) (2.3)                                     Page 48

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                              Review Orders (by service date)                               |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Category                                                  A/S              Admit            |
|Patient                                                   Loc              Status           |
|Attend Dr                                                 Rm                                |
|Service Date                                              Bd               Unit #           |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                             2
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                             2
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Category              You have the following two choices:

                      *   Identify a category for which you want to review
                          orders for a patient. For example, to review all
                          Cardiology orders for a patient, enter the mnemonic
                          for the cardiology category.

                      *   Press <Enter> to bypass this prompt and avoid
                          restricting the list of orders to a specific
                          category.



Patient               Use one of the standard methods to identify a
                      patient.

                      There are several patient identification methods:

                      *     by account number
Review Orders (by service date) (2.3)                                   Page 49




                       *     by social security number

                       *     by unit number (Enter U#, followed by the unit
                             number.)

                       *     by full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,MIDDLEINITIAL
                             format, using up to 43 characters

                       *     by location (in selected OE routines, described
                             below)

                       NOTE: Restricted users can identify patients whose
                       locations are associated with their devices.

                       Identifying Patients by Location
                       In this routine, you can identify patients by location.
                       This provides a quick and efficient method of entering
                       and editing orders on several patients at a location.

                       To identify a patient by location:

                       1.    Enter <L> <Spacebar> [mnemonic of any location] The
                             unit number and name of the first patient at that
                             location in room/bed order appears.

                       2.    Use <Prev> and <Next> to scroll through the list of
                             patients.

                       3.    Press <Enter> to select a patient.

                       Moving to Another Patient After Finishing with a Patient

                       If you select a patient, but wish to move to another
                       patient without saving anything, press <Exit>. The next
                       patient at that location appears.

When you have identified the patient, this patient registration information
appears on the screen:

                  *   Age and Sex (A/S)         *   Admission Date
                  *   Hospital Location         *   Status
                  *   Room Number               *   Unit Number
                  *   Bed Number                *   Attending Doctor


In addition to the registration information, all orders for the specified
service date, and for all dates after that, are available for your review
and/or edit. The orders are displayed in the center of the screen, arranged by
time of entry. A message at the upper right of the screen shows you the total
Review Orders (by service date) (2.3)                                      Page 50



number of orders and the number of orders that are marked.    At this point it
reads:

                   0 \/ of N(umber of Orders)

Seven orders are visible at a time, starting with the first one for service on
the date you are reviewing. The last order is highlighted. You can scroll up
and down through the orders by using the UP and DOWN arrows; the highlight
moves as you do so.


Service Date            Enter the service date for the orders you wish to
                        view.

                        Dietary Orders-Concurrent Diets

                        When entering a new dietary order, you may want to view
                        the patient's primary and concurrent diets. To gain the
                        desired information:

                        1.   Identify the Dietary category and patient.

                        2.   Enter C at ORDER DATE for a list of all the
                             patient's current diets.


This has been changed from handling only the orders' duplicate flags, to now
handling that as only a 'D' and also an 'I' to indicate pacs images attached.

Performing a function

To perform a function, type in the two leading letters of the application.
These letters should be highlighted. You can act on one order at a time -- the
one with the highlighted bar through it. Or you can act on several at a
time, by "marking" them as described below. After you mark the order(s) you
want to act on, select the processing function you want, then press <Enter>.
Only marked orders are acted upon.

NOTES:   If one or more orders are marked, the highlighted order is acted
         upon only if it is also marked.


Marking an order

One order

Highlight the order of interest, using the UP and DOWN arrows. Press the Right
Ctrl Key. A check appears in the leftmost column beside the highlighted order,
and the message at the top right of the screen reads:

                        1\/ of N(umber of orders)
Review Orders (by service date) (2.3)                                  Page 51



Continue marking as many orders as you like. A check appears beside each
marked order, and the message at the top right of the screen tells you how many
orders are checked.

All orders at once

If no orders are marked, you can mark them all at once by simultaneously
pressing <Shift> and the Right Ctrl key.

Removing the mark from one or all orders

To remove the check from one marked order, highlight it and press the Right
Ctrl key. To remove the checks from all the marked orders, simultaneously
press <Shift> and the Right Ctrl key.
Enter Department Orders (2.4)                                           Page 52



2.4:   Enter Department Orders


The Enter Department Orders Routine allows users in Departments to enter
orders for tests, treatments, nursing interventions, diets, supplies and other
health care organization requirements.

This routine differs from the Enter Care Area Orders Routine in that users must
enter the order's status, and also users may backdate orders. Care Area users
cannot use this routine to enter orders; they must use the Enter Care Area
Orders Routine.

Entering Order Sets

Any group of procedures that are commonly ordered together can be entered as a
set. An example is a standard set of procedures that is performed for every
patient who is scheduled for surgery. All the procedures in a set can be from
one category or, more frequently, there will be procedures from numerous
categories in one set. Order Sets are defined in the Order Set Dictionary.
They are extremely flexible, as procedures can be added, deleted or edited at
the time of order entry.

Entering Series Orders

Orders for procedures that are typically performed several times on a regular
schedule can be ordered in series. The time(s) of the day and the days of the
week when such procedures should be performed can be specified.


Changing the Patient Name Before Filing Orders

If the user notices the wrong patient was selected prior to filing the orders,
the user can correct the patient name by following these steps:

1.   Press <PREV FIELD> repeatedly to move the cursor backward a field at a
     time. When you press this key at the ORDER DR field, a pop-up window like
     the one below appears:

        +-----------------------------------------------------+
        !                                                     !
        ! CHANGE PATIENT TO __________________________        !
        !                                                     !
        +-----------------------------------------------------+

2.   Identify the correct patient using any patient identification method.

     The pop-up window disappears and the correct patient's name appears at the
     PATIENT prompt.

3.   File the orders or charges.
Enter Department Orders (2.4)                                          Page 53



Viewing Orders After They Have Been Entered

Use the Process Orders Routine to view all the orders that have been entered
for a patient. The Process Orders Routine shows detail for each order. Under
some circumstances, it allows users to perform various functions associated
with the order:

    *   view order history         * enter charges and credits for the order
    *   edit order                 * enter a results report
    *   reprint order              * enter or edit the name of the technician
    *   delete order                 who performed the procedure
    *   edit status


+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                  Enter Department Orders                                   |
|============================================================================================|
|User                                                      A/S              Admit            |
|Therapist/Tech                                            Loc              Status           |
|Order Status                                              Rm                                |
|                                                          Bd               Unit #           |
|Patient                                                                                     |
|Attend Dr                                                                                   |
|Order Dr                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                        .1
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                        .1
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
| _                                                                                        _ |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


User                   The USER prompt displays the user initials and name
                       as they are defined in the MIS User Dictionary. This
                       field cannot be edited. The user's initials are captured
                       for each transaction performed and appear on various
                       requisitions and reports.


Therapist/Tech         Enter the mnemonic of the therapist or technician
                       who is performing the procedure. A Lookup to the MIS
                       User Dictionary is available.
Enter Department Orders (2.4)                                           Page 54



                     A response to this prompt is not required.

                     NOTE:    If a therapist/technician is defined, orders can
                              only be placed for the departments the
                              therapist/technician has access to in the MIS User
                              Dictionary.

                     The following flag will display if a category is chosen
                     that is in a department the user does not have access to
                     in the MIS User Dictionary:

                             USER does not have access to DEPARTMENT


Order Status         Enter the status of the order being entered:
                     Logged, In Process or Complete.


Patient              Identify the patient to enter orders for.
                     Restricted users can only identify patients at the
                     location of the terminal being worked from.

                     When the patient has been identified, the following
                     patient registration information appears on the screen:

                     Age and Sex (A/S)       Admission Date
                     Hospital Location       Status
                     Room Number             Unit Number
                     Bed Number              Attending Doctor


Order Dr             Depending on how your health care organization sets
                     system parameters, this field is either blank or the
                     Attending Provider is the default response.

                     * If the field is blank:

                        Enter the mnemonic of the provider who is ordering the
                        procedure from the Provider Dictionary. A Lookup is
                        available.

                     * If the Attending Provider is the default response:

                        Press <Enter> to accept the default response.

                        If the Ordering Doctor is different from the
                        Attending Provider, delete the default mnemonic and
                        choose the mnemonic of the provider who is ordering the
                        procedure from the Provider Dictionary. A Lookup is
                        available. When the mnemonic is entered, the full name
Enter Department Orders (2.4)                                           Page 55



                        of the provider appears beside it.


Category              Enter the mnemonic of the category associated with
                      the procedure being ordered. A Lookup is available.

                      NOTES:    To see an alphabetical listing of available
                                categories by name, enter a letter or letters
                                and press <Lookup>.

                                To do a Wildcard Lookup, enter an asterisk (*)
                                followed by a word or phrase. A Lookup screen
                                of all procedures from all categories containing
                                that word or phrase displays.

                      When a category is chosen, an indicator arrow appears to
                      the left of that category. Any health care
                      organization-defined prompts specified for that category
                      appear in the lower section of the screen and the cursor
                      moves to the Procedure prompt.

                      Each time an order is entered, the indicator arrow moves
                      to the left of that order. Scroll up and down through
                      orders by using the up and down arrows; the indicator
                      arrow moves to the corresponding order. Orders with the
                      arrow next to it can be edited or deleted before filing.

                      NOTE:     An Order Set can be indicated at the Category
                                prompt. Enter a slash (/) followed by the Order
                                Set mnemonic or enter a slash (/) and press
                                <Lookup> to see a list of available Order Sets.


Procedure            Enter the mnemonic of the procedure associated with
                     the specified category. A Lookup of procedures in the
                     selected category is available.

                     The following lookup methods are available:

                                             Full          Partial
                     Lookup Method           Lookup        Lookup

                     Alphabetically by        <Lookup>     [chars]<Lookup>
                     procedure name                        (e.g., EL<Lookup>)

                     Numerically by          #<Lookup>     #[num]<Lookup>
                     procedure number                      (e.g., #500<Lookup>)

                     Wildcard by word                      *[word or phrase]
                     or phrase                             <Lookup>
Enter Department Orders (2.4)                                            Page 56



                                                         (e.g., *CARD)

                     When the mnemonic is entered, the full description of
                     the procedure appears beside it.

                     Some responses may default in if they have been defined
                     in the Procedure Dictionary such as priority and
                     quantity. Depending on how the Procedure Dictionary is
                     defined, default responses can be edited.

                     If health care organization-defined prompts are defined
                     for the procedure, they will appear in the lower section
                     of the screen below any health care organization-defined
                     prompts for the category.


                     Entering Series Orders

                     To place a Series Order from the Procedure Prompt, enter
                     a slash (/) followed by the mnemonic for the procedure,
                     from the Procedure Dictionary. The cursor moves to the
                     Priority prompt, and the full name of the procedure
                     appears on the screen, along with the default priority,
                     quantity (if applicable) and date.

                     In addition, the health care organization-defined prompts
                     for the procedure appear in the lower section of the
                     screen. Responses to hospital-defined prompts for the
                     procedure apply to every order in the series.

                     The following Series Order-specific prompts appear at the
                     bottom of the screen:

                     DIRECTIONS     Enter information that describes the
                                    schedule on which the procedure should be
                                    performed.

                     STOP DATE      Enter the date on which the procedure
                                    should stop, using a T combination or the
                                    standard date format. A response to this
                                    prompt is required. The Start Date is the
                                    service date of the order.


                     STOP TIME      Enter the time at which the procedure
                                    should stop, in standard 24-hour HHMM
                                    format. The Start Time is the service
                                    time of the order.
Enter Department Orders (2.4)                                          Page 57



                     NOTE:   Series Orders cannot be used for diets.


Priority             Enter or edit the order's priority: S (STAT), U
                     (Urgent), or R (Routine). The priority determines the
                     order's sequence on the Print Queue.

                     The priority of a procedure can be defined in the
                     Procedure Dictionary to default into the priority prompt
                     when ordering the procedure. The defaulting priority
                     can be edited when entering the procedure, if necessary.

                     NOTE:   This prompt is bypassed for orders in Diet
                             and Payment type categories.

                     This is a required field.


QTY                   The cursor stops here only if the ASK QUANTITY
                      prompt is set to Y in the Procedure Dictionary for this
                      procedure. A quantity can be defined to default into
                      this prompt from the Procedure Dictionary. A default
                      quantity can be edited when ordering the procedure.

                      If no quantity defaults into this prompt, the quantity
                      can be entered when ordering the procedure.


Date T+              Enter the service date for this procedure. Press
                     <Enter> to accept the default response T+ and schedule
                     the procedure for the current date. When entering
                     multiple orders for the same date, press <Get> to copy
                     the date from the order on the previous line.

                     Entering Past and Future Dates

                     The health care organization may have predefined date
                     limits. For example, some procedures may be ordered up
                     to 365 days in advance, or up to 30 days in the past. The
                     service date limitations are defined in the Order Entry
                     parameters.

                     Enter T+[number] to indicate a future date that conforms
                     to the future date limit.

                     Enter T-[number] to indicate a past date that conforms
                     to the past date limit.


Time                  Enter a service time for this procedure.
Enter Department Orders (2.4)                                         Page 58




                     * Enter N(ow) to capture the time the session if filed

                     * Enter a specific time in 24-hour HHMM format

                     * Press <Get> to copy the time from the previous order

                     If no time is entered, the order is entered for the date
                     shown at the left with no specified time. In this case,
                     a service time is not available for monitoring on a
                     review screen.

                     If a time is not specified for a future order for a
                     category set to Hold Future Orders, that order will go to
                     the bottom of the Print Queue.

                     If a service time isn't entered or the service time is
                     before the current time, and the system's DISPLAY 'TIME
                     IS PAST' MESSAGE parameter is set to Y, the "Time is
                     Past. OK?" message appears. Verify that the past service
                     time is correct or return to the TIME prompt and edit it.

                     Dietary Orders

                     Enter the abbreviation for the meal at which the diet
                     should start instead of entering a time. Meals are
                     defined as:

                                B   - Breakfast
                                L   - Lunch
                                D   - Dinner

                     Orders for Held Meals

                     An error message will display if a diet is entered for a
                     meal that is currently on hold. The message will display
                     that the meal is on hold and the release time. This
                     message can be ignored and a diet can be entered if
                     desired.


Here                  The cursor stops here only if the ASK PRINT HERE
                      prompt is set to Y for this procedure in the Procedure
                      Dictionary.

                      If the ASK PRINT HERE prompt is set to N in the
                      Procedure Dictionary, the HERE prompt is bypassed.

                      If the ASK PRINT HERE prompt is set to Y in the
                      Procedure Dictionary, the user determines whether or not
Enter Department Orders (2.4)                                         Page 59



                      the procedure's requistions print to the print
                      destinations defined in the Procedure Dictionary or to
                      the ordering location when entering the order.

                      Enter N to print the requistions to the locations
                      defined in the Procedure Dictionary.

                      Enter Y to print all requistions to the ordering
                      location. If requistions for this procedure are set up
                      to print to four different locations, all four
                      requistions will print to the ordering location, or
                      "HERE".
Process Orders (2.5)                                                           Page 60



2.5:       Process Orders


This routine allows orders entered for a patient in a specific department to be
processed.

After the department and patient have been identified, the orders entered in
the department for that patient appear on the screen.

For each order, the following information is displayed:

       *   date and time of service        *   status of the order
       *   ordering doctor                 *   status of the results report
       *   category                        *   name of performing technician
       *   order number                    *   hospital-defined queries (in the
       *   procedure                           lower section of the screen, only for
       *   priority and quantity               the highlighted order

The following processing functions can be performed on an order.          These
functions are defined in the Access Dictionary:

                            *   Edit Status
                            *   Enter Orders
                            *   Amend Orders
                            *   Reprint Orders
                            *   Enter Charges or Credits
                            *   Delete Orders
                            *   Edit Technician
                            *   Renew
                            *   Sign Orders
                            *   View Appointment
                            *   View History

Orders can be batch processed by checking mulitple orders using the special
functions or right control key.


Processing Orders

The highlighted order will be processed. To process multiple orders, mark the
orders with the right control key. To perfom a function on the highlighted
order or multiple checked orders, type in the two leading, highlighted letters
of the function and press the <Enter> or the OK key. The processing screen
will display.

NOTE:       If only one order is marked, that highlighted order will be processed.


Marking an order

One order
Process Orders (2.5)                                                   Page 61



Highlight the order of interest, using the UP and DOWN arrows. Press the Right
Ctrl Key. A check appears in the leftmost column beside the highlighted order,
and the message at the top right of the screen reads:

                       1\/ of N(umber of orders)

Continue marking as many orders as you like. A check appears beside each
marked order, and the message at the top right of the screen tells you how many
orders are checked.

All orders at once

If no orders are marked, you can mark them all at once by simultaneously
pressing <Shift> and the Right Ctrl key.

Removing the mark from one or all orders

To remove the check from one marked order, highlight it and press the Right
Ctrl key. To remove the checks from all the marked orders, simultaneously
press <Shift> and the Right Ctrl key.
Process Orders (2.5)                                                    Page 62

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                       Process Orders                                       |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|User                                                      A/S              Admit            |
|                                                          Loc              Status           |
|Dept/Cat                                                  Rm                                |
|Patient                                                   Bd               Unit #           |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                             2
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                             2
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


User                   The USER prompt displays the user initials and name
                       as they are defined in the MIS User Dictionary. This
                       field cannot be edited. The user's initials are
                       captured for each transaction performed and appear on
                       various requisitions and reports.


Department/Category    Identify a department or a category to process
                       orders.

                       Identifying a Department

                       Under some circumstances, the mnemonic for a department
                       appears at this prompt. To process orders for that
                       department, press <Enter>. To process orders for a
                       different department, delete the default response and
                       enter another department's mnemonic or choose another
                       department from the Lookup.
Process Orders (2.5)                                                   Page 63



                       If no department name appears, enter the department's
                       mnemonic. A lookup to the MIS Location Dictionary is
                       available.

                       NOTE:    The user can only access departments that
                                have been assigned in the MIS User Dictionary,
                                at the Access to OE routines for departments:
                                prompt.

                       The following message will display when a user tries to
                       access a department he/she has not been given access
                       to:

                               [User name] does not have access to
                               [department name]


                       Identifying a Category

                       To identify a category instead of a department, delete
                       the default response to this prompt, if any. Enter the
                       letter C, followed by a space, followed by the mnemonic
                       of the category. A Lookup is available.

                       NOTE:    Users can only access categories in
                                departments to which they are given access in
                                the MIS User Dictionary. The following message
                                will display when a user tries to access a
                                department he/she has not been given access to:

                                [User name] does not have access to
                                [category's] department.


Patient                If a department was identified at the previous
                       prompt, identify a patient to process orders for.

                       If a category was identified at the previous prompt,
                       identify an individual patient or order. If an
                       individual order is identified, only that order appears
                       on the screen.

                       Restricted users can only identify patients or orders
                       for patients at the location of the terminal being
                       worked from.


                       To identify an individual order

                       If a category is identified at the previous prompt, an
Process Orders (2.5)                                                     Page 64



                       an individual order can be identified at this prompt to
                       process.

                       Enter the letter O, followed by a space, followed by the
                       order number to process.

                       NOTE: A Lookup by date is available by entering the
                             letter O, followed by a space, followed by four
                             digits, representing the month and the day, or by
                             entering the letter O, followed by a space,
                             followed by a T combination. For example:

                                Enter O 0729 <Lookup>, for a Lookup starting with
                                orders placed on July 29.

                                Enter O T-1 <Lookup>, for a Lookup starting with
                                orders placed yesterday.

                           When the patient or order for the patient has been
                           identified, the following patient registration
                           information appears on the screen:

                           Age and Sex             Hospital Location
                           Room and Bed Numbers,   Admission Date
                           Admission Date          Status
                           Unit Number

If a patient was identified, rather than an individual order, all the orders
entered for this patient, in the department specified are available for
processing. The orders are displayed in the center of the screen, arranged by
service date and time. A message at the upper right of the screen shows the
total number of orders and the number of orders that are marked as detailed
below:

                  0 \/ of N(umber of Orders)

Six orders are visible at a time, starting with the one scheduled for the
earliest service date. The last order displayed is highlighted. Scroll up and
down through the orders by using the up and down arrows; the highlight moves
accordingly.


This has been changed from handling only the orders' duplicate flags, to now
handling that as only a 'D' and also an 'I' to indicate pacs images attached.


Description of Functions

Edit Status            Upon selecting the ES function, the following
                       message appears at the bottom of the screen:
Process Orders (2.5)                                                       Page 65




                         L (Logged), I (In Process), C (Complete),
                                   or X (Cancelled)

                        Enter the appropriate status for the order.


Enter Orders            When an authorized user selects ENTER ORDERS, the
                        Enter Department Orders Screen appears, allowing you to
                        enter further orders for the patient whose orders you
                        are processing.


Amend Orders            Selecting AMEND ORDERS displays an Edit Orders screen
                        with the order or first order of the orders highlighted.

                        Complete and cancelled orders cannot be edited. The
                        following elements of any order that is not completed or
                        cancelled can be edited:

                              *   the ordering doctor
                              *   the service date and time
                              *   the priority and quantity
                              *   the responses to queries associated with the
                                  order


Reprint Orders         Upon selecting Reprint Orders, the REPRINT ORDER'S
                       PAPERWORK screen is displayed for the first order marked.
                       The following information can be edited:

                              * the format of the printed order form
                              * its destination(s) (the printer(s) at which
                                the order form will be printed)
                              * the number of copies to be printed


Enter Charge/          Upon selecting the Enter Charge/Credit function, the Enter
Credit                 Charge/Credit screen displays with the first order marked.
                       This is the same screen that is accessible through the
                       Enter Departmental Charge/Credit Routine.


Delete Orders          Order that were entered by the Department can be deleted.
                       Orders entered by the Care Area can not be deleted.

                       When selecting an order entered by the Department or in
                       the category, the following message is displayed:

                              Reason for deletion:
Process Orders (2.5)                                                     Page 66



Edit Tech              Upon selecting the ET function, a window appears to enter
                       or edit the mnemonic of the technician or therapist who
                       performed the procedure. A Lookup is available.

                       This function is particularly useful for departments that
                       do not identify the technician or therapist when entering
                       an order.


Renew Orders           Procedures are defined as renewable in the Procedure
                       Dictionary. If a procedure is renewable, selecting the RN
                       function displays the following message:

                               Renew order(s)?


View Appt              Selecting the View Appointment function displays the View
                       Appointment screen in PCI for the selected order.


Sign Order             If an order is defined to have signatures, the SO function
                       accesses the Sign Orders routine allowing users to
                       electronically sign an order. Once the order is signed,
                       the sign date and time appears next to the user who signed
                       the order on the Sign Orders screen.


View History           Selecting the VH function displays the Summary of Orders
                       by Category screen. Move the highlight bar to the
                       category of orders to be viewed and press <Enter>. The
                       Order History for the selected category displays. Use the
                       arrow keys to move up and down in the screen. Right arrow
                       in to view the selected order.
Amend Order Function (2.5.1)                                             Page 67



2.5.1:   Amend Order Function


When you enter AO, for Amend Orders, the Edit Orders Screen appears,
displaying the first of the orders you marked.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                        EDIT ORDERS                                         |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|User                                                                                        |
|                                                                                            |
|Patient                                                   A/S              Admit            |
|Attend Dr                                                 Loc              Status           |
|                                                          Rm                                |
|                                                          Bd               Unit #           |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                 ---Service---                              |
| Order Dr     Category    Procedure   Order No   Date     Time Pri Qty Status Here          |
|                                                                   .8                       |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


You can edit these elements of an unverified or verified order:

          *   ordering doctor
          *   service date and time (meal for diets)
          *   priority (not applicable for diets)
          *   responses to queries associated with the order

You can also edit the following elements depending on the Procedure Dictionary
specifications:

          *   quantity (not applicable for diets)
          *   whether requisitions are printed at the usual locations or at the
              printer associated with the ordering terminal.


Once you have completed editing the first order, this message appears:

                File?
Amend Order Function (2.5.1)                                           Page 68




Enter Y or N.

If you enter N, the cursor returns to the editing screen for further
editing.

If you enter Y, and you have marked only one order for editing, the cursor
returns to the main Process Orders screen.

If you enter Y, and you have marked more than one order for editing, this
message appears:

                               Edit Which Order?

                               Current Order
                               Next Order
                               Edit All Orders
                               eXit

                               Selection


NOTE:   You cannot edit an order that has been cancelled or transmitted to
        an ancillary department. If you you try to do so, one of these messages
        appears:

                 Can't edit a cancelled order
                Can't edit a transmitted order
Delete Order Function (2.5.2)                                          Page 69



2.5.2:   Delete Order Function


When you enter DO, for Delete Orders, you can delete the order you have
highlighted, or delete several orders by marking them with the Right Control
key.

When you select an order entered by the Department or in the category and
choose the DO function, this message appears at the bottom of the screen:

                       Reason for deletion:

Enter free text of up to 60 characters.   For example:

                       Ordered by mistake

The order is deleted from the screen and from all patient records except the
Cancelled Procedures Report, which shows when it was deleted, by whom and for
what reason.

If you try to delete an order entered by a Care Area, this message appears:

                       Can't delete an order entered by a Care Area.
Edit Status Function (2.5.3)                                              Page 70



2.5.3:   Edit Status Function


When you select ES, for Edit Status, this message appears at the bottom of
the screen:

            L (Logged), I (In Process), C (Complete), or X (Cancelled):

Enter the initial letter of the status that the order should have.   The status
of the order changes to reflect your entry.

You can cancel an order as long as it has not been resulted.   When you
cancel an order, this prompt appears:

                           Reason for cancellation:

Choose a response from a Group Response lookup (defined in the MIS Group
Response Dictionary and added to the OE Parameters) or enter up to 60
characters of free text to describe why the order is being cancelled. The
reason appears on the order and the Cancelled Procedures Report (generated via
the Cancelled Procedures Routine on the standard OE Ancillary Department Menu).
Cancelling an order credits the procedure in your billing system.
Edit Technician Function (2.5.4)                                      Page 71



2.5.4:   Edit Technician Function


When you select ET, for Edit Technician, a window appears in which you can
enter or edit the initials of the technician who entered the report results.    A
LOOKUP into the MIS User Dictionary is available. The technician that is
chosen must have access to the Department associated to the orders Category.
Enter Charge/Credit Function (2.5.5)                                       Page 72



2.5.5:   Enter Charge/Credit Function


When you select EC, for Enter Charge/Credit, the following screen appears,
displaying the first of the orders you marked. (This is the same screen that
is accessible through the Enter Departmental Charge/Credit Routine.) You can
enter new billing transactions as follows:

                * change the quantity of an order
                * enter a new amount for an order, if the procedure is
                  defined as Charge Editable in the Procedure Dictionary
                * issue a charge or credit for the order

NOTES:   You can enter hospital and professional transactions if you
         have access to the Enter Charge/Credit-Departmental function through
         the Access Dictionary. If you have access only to the Enter
         Charge/Credit function, you can only enter hospital transactions.

         You cannot enter charges or credits for procedures in categories that
         interface to another module, such as Blood Bank, Laboratory,
         Microbiology and Radiology. If you try do do so, the following message
         appears:

                Charges and credits cannot be entered for interfaced
                categories

For information about how charges for procedures are generated, see the section
on Billing in the Procedure Dictionary.
Enter Charge/Credit Function (2.5.5)                                     Page 73

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                      ENTER CHARGE/CREDIT                                   |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|User                                                                                        |
|                                                                                            |
|Patient                                                     A/S             Admit           |
|Attend Dr                                                   Loc             Status          |
|                                                            Rm                              |
|                                                            Bd              Unit #          |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                    ---Service---                           |
|   Order Dr     Category    Procedure    Order No   Date     Time Pri   Qty Status Here     |
|                                                                      6
|
|   -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------    |
|   Procedure                        Billing No      Unit $ B.O.S. Editable $ Unit Value     |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|            Act Date Qty    Amount Cr M/A User        B/AR Comment                          |
|                                             .1                                             |
|                                                                                            |
|                                             .1                                             |
|                     --- ---------                                                          |
|New Transactions           .2                                                               |
|                           .2                                                               |
|                     --- ---------                                                          |
|   Current Total                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+

The upper half of the screen displays information about the patient and the
order; you cannot edit this information.

The lower half of the screen displays billing information; you can make entries
only in the section titled New Transactions.

For each order, the screen displays this billing information from the Procedure
Dictionary:

         * the Procedure Number        * The Bill On Status
         * the Billing Number          * whether it is Charge Editable
         * the Unit Price              * the Unit Value


In addition, it displays this information about previous billing transactions:

         * the activity date of the transaction
           (if there has been more than one transaction, the cursor rests
           beside this prompt, allowing you to scroll through transactions)
         * the quantity of the procedure
         * the amount charged for the procedure
         * whether the amount was entered manually (M) through this routine,
           or automatically (A) as a result of users' entries in other
           routines of the module
Enter Charge/Credit Function (2.5.5)                                    Page 74



           * the user who entered the transaction
           * any comments made by that user


You can enter information under Hospital and/or Professional transactions, as
follows:


QUANTITY                If applicable, enter a new quantity for this order.


AMOUNT                  The cursor stops at this prompt only if this
                        procedure is set up as Charge Editable in the Procedure
                        Dictionary.

                        For such a procedure you can enter a charge amount,
                        using up to 6 digits, with 2 decimal places.


CR                      Enter Y if credit should be issued for this
                        procedure, N if it should not.



COMMENT                 Enter any comments that are applicable, such as the
                        reason for the transaction you just entered. These
                        comments are displayed on this screen, and on the
                        Billing List.
Enter Order Function (2.5.6)                                           Page 75



2.5.6:   Enter Order Function


When you select EO, for Enter Department Orders, the Enter Orders screen
appears, allowing you to enter further orders for the patient whose orders you
are processing.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                  ENTER DEPARTMENT ORDERS                                   |
|============================================================================================|
|User                                                      A/S              Admit            |
|Therapist/Tech                                            Loc              Status           |
|Order Status                                              Rm                                |
|                                                          Bd               Unit #           |
|Patient                                                                                     |
|Attend Dr                                                                                   |
|Order Dr                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                        .1
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                        .1
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
| _                                                                                        _ |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+

For more information, see the documentation for the Enter Orders Routine.
Renew Order Function (2.5.7)                                           Page 76



2.5.7:   Renew Order Function


Procedures may be defined as renewable in the Procedure Dictionary. If a
procedure is defined as renewable, upon selecting the RN function, a prompt
displays asking if you would like to renew the order.

If in the Procedure Dictionary, the procedure is defined to require signature,
you are prompted for their PIN number or password, depending on how you are
defined in the MIS Module.

Users are also allowed to check off multiple orders and renew a batch. This is
done by checking off orders. There is a notation in the top right hand corner
of the screen indicating how many orders are checked to be renewed.
Reprint Orders Function (2.5.8)                                        Page 77



2.5.8:   Reprint Orders Function


When you select RO, for Reprint Orders, a Reprint Order's Paperwork screen
appears, displaying the first of the orders you marked. You can edit:

                     * the format of the printed order form

                     * its destination(s), that is, the printer(s) at which the
                       order form will be printed

                     * the number of copies to be printed.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                 REPRINT ORDER'S PAPERWORK                                  |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|User                                                                                        |
|                                                                                            |
|Patient                                                    A/S             Admit            |
|Attend Dr                                                  Loc             Status           |
|                                                           Rm                               |
|                                                           Bd              Unit #           |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                   ---Service---                            |
| Order Dr     Category     Procedure   Order No    Date       Time Pri  Qty Status Here     |
|
|
|                                                                                            |
| ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------    |
|                                                                                            |
|                              Format      Destination       Copies                          |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+

FORMAT                 The mnemonic of the printing format requested for
                       this procedure in the Procedure Dictionary appears at
                       this prompt. Enter <RETURN> if you want to reprint the
                       order form in that format. If you want to reprint it
                       in another format, delete the existing mnemonic and
                       enter the appropriate mnemonic.


DESTINATION            The mnemonic of the printer to which this format of
                       the order form should be sent, as set up in the
                       Procedure Dictionary, appears at this prompt. If you
                       want to reprint the order form at the same printer,
Reprint Orders Function (2.5.8)                                      Page 78



                      press <RETURN>. If you want to reprint the order form
                      at a different printer, delete the existing mnemonic
                      and enter the mnemonic of the appropriate printer. A
                      LOOKUP is available.


COPIES                The number of copies of this format of the order
                      form to be printed, as set up in the Procedure
                      Dictionary, appear at this prompt. Enter <RETURN> if
                      this is the number you want to print. If you want to
                      print a different number, delete this number and
                      enter the appropriate number.
Sign Order Function (2.5.9)                                            Page 79



2.5.9:   Sign Order Function


If an order is defined to require signatures, the SO function accesses the
Sign Orders routine allowing users to electronically sign an order. Once
signed the sign date and time appears next to the user who signed the order.
View Appointment Function (2.5.10)                                     Page 80



2.5.10:   View Appointment Function


If the procedure is generated based on a Scheduled Appointment in the
Scheduling Module, users have the ability to view information about the
appointment. Choosing VA for the View Appointment function will bring the
user into the Scheduling Module to view information about the associated
appointment.

If there is no appointment associated to a procedure the following message will
appear when selecting VA:

                           Cannot view appointment
                           REASON: No appointment selected
View History Function (2.5.11)                                         Page 81



2.5.11:   View History Function


When you select VH, for View History, a window called Summary of Orders by
Category appears. In the window is a list that includes each category
associated to the Department or Category chosen. Move the highlight to the
category of orders that you want to view and press the Right arrow key. The
system brings you into the Patient Care Inquiry Option to allow you to view the
history of orders that have been entered for the patient in the category you
selected.

Once you are in the Patient Care Inquiry module, test results are available in
graphic and tabular form, and can also be printed.

For more information, see the User Manual for the Patient Care Inquiry Option.
Process UNV/PRV/SCH Orders (by loc) (2.6)                              Page 82



2.6:   Process UNV/PRV/SCH Orders (by loc)


The Process UNV/PRV/SCH Orders (by loc) routine lists all orders which require
either acknowledgement or verification. The intent of this routine is that
users review their location on a regular basis to determine the orders which
require acknowledgement and/or verification. Once an order has been verified
or acknowledged, the order is removed from this routine upon utilizing the
Verify/Acknol function.

Order Verification

In the Access Dictionary, access groups are defined as being verified or
unverified users. If you are defined as an unverified user, orders you enter
are filed as unverified with a status of UNV. To allow UNV orders to process,
a verified user must verify the order. This routine lists all orders which are
at an UNV status for a selected location.

Order Acknowledgement

Orders which are entered in PCI or in the Scheduling Module require
acknowledgement in Order Entry. The purpose of order acknowledgement is to
provide a way in which care area users review the orders which may have been
placed for a patient by a provider or another user. Lack of acknowledgement
does not prevent an order from processing, however, orders requiring
acknowledgement (e.g. orders placed from PCI or Scheduling) remain in this
routine until they are acknowledged.


Incomplete Orders (UNV PHY or UNV SCH Status)

When an order is placed from either PCI or Scheduling, there is the ability to
enter the order without responding to required queries or prompts. Whether
required queries must be responded to in PCI and/or Scheduling is determined in
the Order Entry Procedure Dictionary at the Enforce Req prompt. If orders are
placed from PCI or Scheduling and are not complete (e.g. required query
responses or prompts are missing), the orders file with the status of UNV PHY
from PCI or UNV SCH from Scheduling.

To verify or acknowledge incomplete orders, the required responses must be
answered by utilizing the Amend Order Function. Once complete, the order may
be verified/acknowledged.
Process UNV/PRV/SCH Orders (by loc) (2.6)                             Page 83

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                            Process Unv/Prv/Sch Orders (by Loc)                             |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Location                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|Patient                                              Unit #              Admit              |
|Attend Dr                                                            Ord Dt&Tm              |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                    2                                                             .2        |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                    2                                                             .2        |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Location              Enter a mnemonic from the Location Dictionary of the
                      MIS Module, which identifies a department or patient
                      care area in the hospital. A Lookup is available.

                      When you enter the mnemonic, the full name of the
                      location appears beside the mnemonic.


Once a location is selected, all unverified or unacknowledged orders display
for the location. You may scroll up and down using the arrow keys to select
an order. As you highlight an order, the correct information such as patient
name, unit number, admission date, attending doctor, and order date and time
appears. To perform a verb strip function on one or more orders, you may use
the Right Ctrl key to select the one order or using the <Shift> Right Ctrl keys
to select all orders.

The following verb strip options are available in this routine:

Amend Order           Upon selecting the AO function, an Edit Orders
                      screen appears, displaying the first of the orders
                      marked for editing.
Process UNV/PRV/SCH Orders (by loc) (2.6)                                Page 84




Cancel Order          Upon selecting the Cancel Order function, the reason
                      for cancel prompt appears allowing the user to enter a
                      reason of cancellation. The parameters determine the
                      responses the user may select from and whether the user
                      may enter free text. The cancellation reason displays
                      at the bottom of the Review Orders screen when the order
                      is highlighted.


Enter Order           Upon selecting the EO function, the Enter Orders
                      screen appears. At this point, users are allowed to
                      enter further orders for the patients whose orders are
                      being reviewed. You may not edit the patient via this
                      function.

                      Users are warned if required Administrative Data queries
                      as defined in the parameters have not been answered.


Print Order           Upon selecting the PO function, the user will be
                      prompted with the following message:

                             Print on:

                      Enter the mnemonic of the printer at which the order
                      should be printed. A Lookup into the Device Dictionary
                      is also available.


Renew Order           Procedures may be defined as renewable in the
                      Procedure Dictionary. If a procedure is defined as
                      renewable, upon selecting the RN function, a prompt
                      displays asking if you would like to renew the order.

                      If in the Procedure Dictionary, the procedure is defined
                      to require signature, you are prompted for their PIN
                      number or password, depending on how you are defined in
                      the MIS Module.

                      Users are also allowed to check off multiple orders and
                      renew a batch. This is done by checking off orders.
                      There is a notation in the top right hand corner of the
                      screen indicating how many orders are checked to be
                      renewed.


Verify/Acknowledge    To verify or acknowledge orders, select VA.   A
                      message asking you if you would like to
                      verify/acknowledge orders appears.

                      Orders that are entered as unverified orders by a user
                      who is an unverified user as defined in the Access
Process UNV/PRV/SCH Orders (by loc) (2.6)                 Page 85



                      Dictionary, require verification.
Process Daily Orders (2.7)                                              Page 86



2.7:   Process Daily Orders


Upon accessing the Process Daily Orders Routine, the user can enter a location
which will result in the loading of all patient's daily orders for that
location, for that day. The user also has the option to bypass the location
prompt and enter a patient, resulting in the loading of only that one patient's
daily orders for that day.

Two fields in the Procedure Dictionary effect the orders which display in this
routine:

1.   Daily Days - A limit can be entered the same as a Series Order which will
     limit the number of days in succession an order can be entered on the
     patient initially.

2.   Maximum Extend Days - This field is used to determine the maximum number
     of days that a particular procedure can be extended for.

After identifying the location and the patient, the orders entered for that
patient appear on the screen. The following verb strip options are available
for processing of the daily orders. All functions (with the exception of
(Extend Daily) are documented in the section of the manual for Review Orders.

                       *   Amend Orders
                       *   Cancel Orders
                       *   Display Orders
                       *   Enter Orders
                       *   Print Orders
                       *   Print Results
                       *   Verify Orders
                       *   View Results

       Extend Daily - This function allows users to extend the daily order up
                      to the amount of days entered in the Maximum Extend Days
                      prompt in the Procedure Dictionary. After choosing ED
                      off the verb-strip, you will be prompted with, "Extend
                      for number of days." You can enter the number of days to
                      have new orders generated. An error message will display
                      if the amount entered is larger than the amount defined
                      at the Maximum Extend Days prompt.


It is possible to "mark" orders to process more than one at a time by using the
right Ctrl key.
Process Daily Orders (2.7)                                               Page 87

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                    Process Daily Orders                                    |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Location                                                  A/S              Admit            |
|Patient                                                   Loc              Status           |
|Attend Dr                                                 Rm                                |
|                                                          Bd               Unit #           |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                  2
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                  2
|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Location              Enter a mnemonic from the Location Dictionary of the
                      MIS Module, which identifies a department or patient
                      care area in the health care organization. A Lookup is
                      available.

                      When entering the mnemonic, the full name of the
                      location appears beside the mnemonic.

                      In order to obtain a list of daily orders for one
                      patient only, as opposed to an entire location, press
                      <Enter>. The cursor moves to the next prompt, where it
                      is possible to enter a patient's name.



Patient               Use one of the standard methods to identify a
                      patient.

                      There are several patient identification methods:
Process Daily Orders (2.7)                                              Page 88




                       *     by account number

                       *     by social security number

                       *     by unit number (Enter U#, followed by the unit
                             number.)

                       *     by full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,MIDDLEINITIAL
                             format, using up to 43 characters

                       *     by partial name

                       *     by recalling the last patient entered in the
                             current terminal session.
                             Press <Spacebar>, then <Enter>


                       NOTE:   Restricted users can identify patients only at
                               their own terminals.

Upon identifying a patient, the following patient registration information
appears on the screen:

                  *   Age and Sex (A/S)          *   Admission Date
                  *   Hospital Location          *   Status
                  *   Room Number                *   Unit Number
                  *   Bed Number                 *   Attending Doctor

In addition to the registration information, all Daily orders entered on the
patient are available for review and/or edit. The orders appear in the center
of the screen, arranged by time of entry. A message at the upper right of the
screen shows the total number of orders and the number of orders that are
marked. At this point it reads:

                  0 \/ of N(umber of Orders)

Seven orders are visible at a time, with the last order being highlighted.
Scrolling up and down through the orders by using the up and down arrows is
possible. The highlight bar moves up and down as the user scrolls.


This has been changed from handling only the orders' duplicate flags, to now
handling that as only a 'D' and also an 'I' to indicate pacs images attached.
Process Renewable Orders (2.8)                                           Page 89



2.8:    Process Renewable Orders


Upon selecting the Process Renewable Orders Routine, the user has the option of
entering a Category. This routine will allow providers to process orders which
require renewal.

The following verb strip functions are available through this routine:

       Amend Orders                   Enter Chg/Cr
       Cancel Orders                  Enter Orders
       Display Orders                 Print Orders
       Ent/Ed Admin Data              Renew Orders
       Ent/Ed Dept Data               Terminate Orders
       Edit Status                    View History
       Edit Tech

All functions work the same as in the Review and Process orders routines. See
those routines for further documentation.

Renew Orders and Terminate Orders however are specific to the Process
Renewable Orders routine.

           Renew Orders       If a procedure is defined as renewable, upon
                              selecting the RN function, a prompt displays asking
                              if you would like to renew the order.


           Terminate Orders   In order to make the order Unrenewable users
                              can use the TO function. This will cause the order
                              to no longer be considered Renewable, and therefore
                              not display within this routine. The order will
                              requeue for printing with the word "TERM" on the
                              requisition to indicate that the renewable order
                              has been terminated.


Defining Procedures as Renewable

Procedures are Renewable if they are defined as such in the OE Procedure
Dictionary. In the Procedure Dictionary a Period is defined which determines
the number of days the order is effective before the Provider is required to
renew the order.

Each provider may define, in the MIS Provider Dictionary, how many days prior
to the renewal date they would like the procedure to appear on their list for
renewal. This is defined based on a number type query attached to this
dictionary.
Process Renewable Orders (2.8)                                           Page 90

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                  Process Renewable Orders                                  |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Category                                               A/S               Loc                |
|Patient                                                Admit             Room               |
|Attend Dr                                              Status            Bed                |
|                                                       Unit #                               |
|Renew Date                                                                                  |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                2           |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                2           |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Category             Enter a mnemonic from the Category Dictionary that
                     identifies the category for which the user would like to
                     report data. Upon entering the mnemonic, the full name
                     of the category appears beside the mnemonic.

                     A Lookup is also available.


Patient              Use one of the standard methods to identify a
                     patient.

                     There are several patient identification methods:

                     *    by account number

                     *    by social security number

                     *    by unit number (Enter U#, followed by the unit
                          number.)
Process Renewable Orders (2.8)                                             Page 91



                      *     by full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,MIDDLEINITIAL
                            format, using up to 43 characters

                      *     by partial name

                      *     by recalling the last patient entered in the
                            current terminal session.
                            Press <Spacebar>, then <Enter>

When identifying a patient, the following patient registration information
appears on the screen:

                  *   Age and Sex (A/S)         *   Admission Date
                  *   Hospital Location         *   Status
                  *   Room Number               *   Unit Number
                  *   Bed Number                *   Attending Doctor

In addition to the registration information, all renewable orders scheduled to
be renewed are available for review and/or edit. The orders appear in the
center of the screen, arranged by time of entry. A message at the upper right
corner of the screen shows the total number of orders and the number of orders
that are marked. At this point it reads:

                  0 \/ of N(umber of Orders)

Seven orders are visible at a time, with the last order being highlighted.
Scrolling up and down through the orders by using the UP and DOWN arrows is
possible. The highlight bar moves as the user scrolls.


Renew Date             The date of the first order to be renewed defaults
                       into this prompt. As you highlight each individual
                       order this prompt will display the Renewal date for that
                       order.

                       After choosing the Renew Order verb strip function and
                       renewing a particular order, this field will update with
                       the new Renewal Date for that order.
Process Renewable Orders (by Provider) (2.9)                             Page 92



2.9:    Process Renewable Orders (by Provider)


Upon selecting the Process Renewable Orders (by Provider) Routine, the user is
immediately prompted to choose a provider. A Lookup into the Provider
Dictionary of MIS is available. This routine allows a user to process orders
that require renewal for only one provider.

The following verb strip functions are available through this routine:

       Amend Orders                   Enter Chg/Cr
       Cancel Orders                  Enter Orders
       Display Orders                 Print Orders
       Ent/Ed Admin Data              Renew Orders
       Ent/Ed Dept Data               Terminate Orders
       Edit Status                    View History
       Edit Tech

All functions work the same as in the Review and Process orders routines. See
those routines for further documentation.

Renew Orders and Terminate Orders however are specific to the Process
Renewable Orders routine.

            Renew Orders       If a procedure is defined as renewable, upon
                               selecting the RN function, a prompt displays
                               asking if you would like to renew the order.


            Terminate Orders   In order to make the order Unrenewable users
                               can use the TO function. This will cause the
                               order to no longer be considered Renewable, and
                               therefore not display within this routine. The
                               order will requeue for printing with the word
                               "TERM" on the requisition to indicate that the
                               renewable order has been terminated.


Defining Procedures as Renewable

Procedures are Renewable if they are defined as such in the OE Procedure
Dictionary. In the Procedure Dictionary a Period is defined which determines
the number of days the order is effective before the Provider is required to
renew the order.

Each provider may define, in the MIS Provider Dictionary, how many days prior
to the renewal date they would like the procedure to appear on their list for
renewal. This is defined based on a number type query attached to this
dictionary.
Process Renewable Orders (by Provider) (2.9)                             Page 93

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                            Process Renewable Orders By Provider                            |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Provider                                               A/S               Loc                |
|Patient                                                Admit             Room               |
|Attend Dr                                              Status            Bed                |
|                                                       Unit #                               |
|Renew Date                                                                                  |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                2           |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                2           |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Provider             Enter a mnemonic from the Provider Dictionary of the
                     MIS module, which will identify a specific provider. A
                     lookup is available.


Patient              Use one of the standard methods to identify a
                     patient.

                     The seven patient identification methods include:

                     *    by account number

                     *    by social security number

                     *    by unit number (Enter U#, followed by the unit
                          number.)

                     *    by full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,MIDDLEINITIAL
                          format, using up to 43 characters
Process Renewable Orders (by Provider) (2.9)                                Page 94




                       *     by partial name

                       *     by recalling the last patient entered in the
                             current terminal session.
                             Press <Spacebar>, then <Enter>

                       *     by location (in selected OE routines, described
                             below)

NOTE:   Restricted users can identify patients only at their own terminals.

Identifying Patients by Location

In this routine, users can identify patients by location. This provides a
quick and efficient method of entering and editing orders on several patients
at a location.

To identify a patient by location:

1.   Enter <L> <Spacebar> [mnemonic of any location]
     The unit number and name of the first patient at that location in
     room/bed order appears.

2.   Use <Page Up> and <Page Down> to scroll through the list of patients.

3.   Press <Enter> to select a patient.


Moving to Another Patient After Finishing with a Patient

If selecting a patient, but then deciding to move to another patient without
saving anything, press <Exit>. The next patient at that location appears.


When identifying a patient, the following patient registration information
appears on the screen:

                   *   Age and Sex (A/S)         *   Admission Date
                   *   Hospital Location         *   Status
                   *   Room Number               *   Unit Number
                   *   Bed Number                *   Attending Doctor

In addition to the registration information, all orders entered on the
specified date are available for review and/or edit. The orders appear in the
center of the screen, arranged by time of entry. A message at the upper right
corner of the screen shows the total number of orders and the number of orders
that are marked. At this point it reads:

                   0 \/ of N(umber of Orders)
Process Renewable Orders (by Provider) (2.9)                             Page 95




Seven orders are visible at a time, starting with the first one placed on the
date being reviewed. The last order is highlighted. Scrolling up and down
through the orders by using the UP and DOWN arrows is possible. The highlight
bar moves as the user scrolls.


Order Date            Today's date is the default response. Press
                      <Enter> to review and/or edit orders that were entered
                      today. To review or edit orders entered on an earlier
                      date, replace today's date with the desired date. format
                      or a T combination. You cannot enter a future date.

                      Dietary Orders-Concurrent Diets

                      When entering a new dietary order, you may want to view
                      the patient's primary and concurrent diets. To gain the
                      desired information:

                      1.   Identify the Dietary category and patient.

                      2.   Enter C at ORDER DATE for a list of all the
                           patient's current diets.



After you identify a patient and order date, this registration information
appears on the screen:

         *   Age and Sex          *   Admission Date
         *   Location             *   Admission Status
         *   Room Number          *   Unit Number
         *   Bed Number           *   Attending Doctor

In addition to the registration information, all orders entered on the
specified date are available for review and edit. If you entered a category at
the CATEGORY prompt, the list includes only orders from the specified category.

The orders are displayed in the center of the screen, with the order having the
earliest order time appearing at the top of the list. Six orders are
visible at a time. For details on using the verb strip to review and edit
orders, refer to the "Conventions" chapter of the Order Entry User Manual.


Reviewing a Different Date's Orders

With the current date's orders visible on the screen, you can move backwards a
day at a time, reviewing each day's orders for the selected patient. For
example, after reviewing today's orders, you could look at yesterday's orders,
or the previous day's orders, etc.
Process Renewable Orders (by Provider) (2.9)                            Page 96




To review a previous date's orders:

1.   Press <Exit>.

2.   Exit? appears.   Enter Y to exit.

3.   If the patient has any orders for a previous date, and in the selected
     category, if any, they appear.

4.   Repeat the above steps to move backwards in time, reviewing the patient's
     orders a day at a time.

If no previous orders exist for a patient, the cursor remains at the ORD DT&TM
prompt on the Review Orders screen.
Sign Orders by Location (2.10)                                         Page 97



2.10:   Sign Orders by Location


This routine is used to Electronically Sign any orders that have been queued
for signatures. A Location is chosen and the system will display all orders
which have not yet been signed by a provider, whose signature authority is
equal to the user signed onto the routine, whether or not that user is queued
to sign those orders.

To sign orders, checkmark the order using the Right Ctrl Key, and then press
<OK> which will prompt you for a PIN or Password (based on your security levels
defined in the MIS Parameters).

If the user is queued to sign an order, or is an alternate signer of any
provider who is queued to sign the order, the user signature will be filed. If
the user is NOT a signer or an alternate signer for the order, his or her
signature will be added to the order. After signature, the order will no
longer display on the SIGN ORDERS BY LOCATION routine for that signer's level
of signature authority.

The order's signature may be viewed from the SIGN ORDERS BY LOCATION routine
by pushing the right arrow or shift right arrow keys. The Screen fragment
containing the order signers will appear below the order display line.
Sign Orders by Location (2.10)                                         Page 98

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                  Sign Orders By Location                                   |
|============================================================================================|
|Location                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|          1                                                                       2         |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|          1                                                                       2         |
|                                                                                            |
| Patient                                     A/S                        Admit               |
|      Loc                  Rm                Bed                        Status              |
|                                             Acct #                     Unit #              |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Location             Enter a mnemonic from the Location Dictionary which
                     identifies the location for which you would like to Sign
                     Orders. A Lookup is available.


Upon entering the location the system will display the orders that are eligible
to be Electronically Signed. The patient information for the order that is
highlighted will appear below the list of orders. As you scroll through the
orders the appropriate patient will appear.
Process/Sign Provider's Orders (2.11)                                   Page 99



2.11:   Process/Sign Provider's Orders


This routine is used to list orders entered by a particular Provider which need
to be electronically signed.

To use this routine, select a provider. A Lookup to the MIS Provider
Dictionary is available. Only providers for which the user is either the signer
or an alternate signer may be selected. Providers have access to up to four
functions in this routine:

         -   Amend Order
         -   Print Order
         -   Cancel Order
         -   Sign Order

Access to these functions is determined by the user's Access group.

Orders to be processed may be selected as in other Process   Routines. Select an
order or check off multiple orders. Note that Shift Right    Ctrl key will check
or un-check all orders. Choose the Sign Orders verb strip    option to Sign the
checked orders. The user is prompted with either a PIN or    Password prompt
depending on how your facilities security level checks are   defined in the MIS
Parameters.

Once the orders are signed a "Y" will appear in the second column of the order
multiple to indicate that the order is signed.
Process/Sign Provider's Orders (2.11)                                  Page 100

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Process/Sign Provider's Orders                               |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Provider                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|          1                                                                        2        |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|          1                                                                        2        |
|                                                                                            |
| Patient                                     A/S                        Admit               |
|      Loc                  Rm                Bed                        Status              |
|                                             Acct #                     Unit #              |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Provider             Enter a mnemonic from the Provider Dictionary of the
                     MIS module, which will identify a specific provider. A
                     Lookup is available.

Upon entering the location the system will display the orders that are eligible
to be Electronically Signed. The patient information for the order that is
highlighted will appear below the list of orders. As you scroll through the
orders the appropriate patient will appear.
Listing Orders and Displaying Order Details (3)                          Page 101



Chapter 3:   Listing Orders and Displaying Order Details


Several Order Entry routines allow you to print lists of orders for different
purposes. You can list orders in the following ways:

         *    unverified orders for all patients at a specific location, or
              one patient

         *    incomplete orders for all patients at a specific location, or
              for one patient

         *    all orders for a patient on a specific date

         *    all orders for a location on a specific date

         *    all orders entered as Daily Orders by patient on a specific
              date

         *    all Renewable orders which are overdue by provider.


You can also perform the following tasks on orders:

         *   reprint the paperwork associated with an order

         *   list the changes or activities related to an order


Routine Summary:   Listing Orders and Displaying Order Details

The following table summarizes the main tasks you can perform related to
listing patient orders and displaying order details. The table also suggests
the appropriate Order Entry routine for each task. The following sections
provide complete details on how to accomplish these tasks.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
      Listing Orders and Displaying Order Details: Tasks and Routines
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

To Perform This Function                        Use This Routine

List all unverified orders for patients         List Unverified Orders
at a location, or for one patient

List incomplete orders for patients at         List Incomplete Orders
a location, or for one patient

List all orders for a patient or a              List Patient Orders
specific date

List all Daily orders for patients at           List Daily Orders
Listing Orders and Displaying Order Details (3)                          Page 102



a location, or for one patient

List all Renewable orders which are               Overdue Renewable Orders
overdue for a Provider

Reprint a specific order, edit a                  Reprint Orders
requisition's format or destination,
or the number of copies printed

List all the changes or other                     Order Audit Trail
activities related to an order

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
List Unverified Orders (3.1)                                               Page 103



3.1:   List Unverified Orders


This routine allows you to list all unverified orders for a specific location
or for a specific patient. If any unverified orders were placed from PCI, an
asterisk (*) appears beside the Ordering Doctor's mnemonic.

The list of unverified orders shows:

               *   the   patient's name and account number
               *   the   date and time of the order
               *   the   ordering doctor
               *   the   user who entered the order
               *   the   category and procedure ordered
               *   the   priority of the order (not applicable for diets)
               *   the   quantity of the order (not applicable for diets)
               *   the   service date and time of the order (meal for diets)

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                            List Unverified Orders                             |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Select UNV                                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|Location/Patient                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Select UNV                Enter the type of unverified orders to be listed on
                          this report. The following choices are available:

                          APP - Unverified appointments from the NPR Scheduling
                                Module

                          PHY - Unverified Physician Order Entry orders from the
                                PCI module

                          SCH - Unverified orders from the NPR Scheduling Module

                          ALL - All unverified orders and appointments


Location/Patient          You can identify a location or a patient. If the
                          mnemonic for a location appears as the default response,
                          you can gain access only to information from that
                          location.

                          If no location appears, enter a mnemonic from the
                          Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that identifies
List Unverified Orders (3.1)                                              Page 104



                      the location for which you want to list unverified
                      orders.

                      NOTE:    Sometimes, no location appears at this prompt and
                               you are nevertheless restricted to a few
                               locations associated with your terminal. In that
                               case, a message appears if you try to enter the
                               name of an inappropriate location:

                                    This device is not associated with that
                                    location.


                      If you want to identify a patient instead of a location,
                      delete the response to this prompt, if any. Enter the
                      letter P, followed by a space, followed by one of these
                      five ways to identify a patient:

                               1 - by account number

                               2 - by unit number
                                   Enter U#, followed by the unit number.

                               3 - by full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,
                                   MIDDLEINITIAL format, using up to 43
                                   characters

                               4 - by partial name

                               5 - by recalling the last patient entered in the
                                   current terminal session
                                   Press the spacebar, then press <RETURN>.
List Incomplete Orders (by patient) (3.2)                                 Page 105



3.2:   List Incomplete Orders (by patient)


This routine allows you to list the incomplete orders for all the patients at
a specific location, or for one patient.

The list of incomplete orders shows:

          *   the   patient's name and account number
          *   the   patient's location, room and bed
          *   the   attending doctor
          *   the   service date and time of the order (meal for diets)
          *   the   order number
          *   the   category and procedure of the order
          *   the   priority of the order (not applicable for diets)
          *   the   quantity of the order (not applicable for diets)
          *   the   status of the order
          *   the   ordering doctor


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                      List Incomplete Orders (by patient)                      |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Location/Patient                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Location/Patient          You can identify a location or a patient. If the
                          mnemonic for a location appears as the default response,
                          you can gain access only to information from that
                          location.

                          If no location appears, enter a mnemonic from the
                          Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that identifies
                          the location for which you want to list unverified
                          orders.

                          NOTE:   Sometimes, no location appears at this prompt and
                                  you are nevertheless restricted to a few
                                  locations associated with your terminal. In that
                                  case, a message appears if you try to enter the
                                  name of an inappropriate location:

                                       This device is not associated with that
                                       location.

                          If you want to identify a patient instead of a location,
                          delete the response to this prompt, if any. Enter the
List Incomplete Orders (by patient) (3.2)                                Page 106



                      letter P, followed by a space, followed by one of these
                      five ways to identify a patient:

                              1 - by account number

                              2 - by unit number
                                  Enter U#, followed by the unit number.

                              3 - by full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,
                                  MIDDLEINITIAL format, using up to 43
                                  characters

                              4 - by partial name

                              5 - by recalling the last patient entered in the
                                  current terminal session
                                  Press the spacebar, then press <RETURN>.
List Patient Orders (3.3)                                                     Page 107



3.3:   List Patient Orders


The List Patient Orders Routine allows you to print a list of all the orders
entered for a specific patient or at a specific location, on a particular date.
The list is arranged by time of order entry. For each order it shows:

              *   the   date and time of order   *   the   quantity
              *   the   category                 *   the   status
              *   the   procedure                *   the   service date and time
              *   the   priority                 *   the   ordering doctor

NOTE: The report includes supplemental text for procedures that are nursing
interventions.

If you like, you can include for each order the queries and responses
associated with the category and procedure.

A status of UNV PHY, meaning Unverified Physician, indicates that the
physician placed the order from the Patient Care Inquiry Module, and left at
least one required field or query incomplete on the order entry screen.

The list provides a convenient way for nurses to check all the orders placed
from a specific location, or all the orders placed for a particular patient.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                              List Patient Orders                              |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Location/Patient                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Order Date                                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|From Time                                                                      |
|Thru Time                                                                      |
|                                                                               |
|Include Detail                                                                 |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Location/Patient          You can identify a location or a patient. If the
                          mnemonic for a location appears as the default response,
                          you can gain access only to information from that
                          location.

                          If no location appears, enter a mnemonic from the
                          Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that identifies
                          the location for which you want to list unverified
                          orders.
List Patient Orders (3.3)                                                Page 108




                      NOTE:   Sometimes, no location appears at this prompt and
                              you are nevertheless restricted to a few
                              locations associated with your terminal. In that
                              case, a message appears if you try to enter the
                              name of an inappropriate location:

                                   This device is not associated with that
                                   location.

                      If you want to identify a patient instead of a location,
                      delete the response to this prompt, if any. Enter the
                      letter P, followed by a space, followed by one of these
                      five ways to identify a patient:

                              1 - by account number

                              2 - by unit number
                                  Enter U#, followed by the unit number.

                              3 - by full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,
                                  MIDDLEINITIAL format, using up to 43
                                  characters

                              4 - by partial name

                              5 - by recalling the last patient entered in the
                                  current terminal session
                                  Press the spacebar, then press <RETURN>.


Order Date            Enter the date for which you want a list of patient
                      orders, using the standard format or a T combination.
                      You cannot enter a future date.


From Time             Enter the time at which you want to start the list
                      of orders, using the standard format.


Thru Time             Enter the time at which you want to end the list of
                      patient orders, using the standard format.


Include Detail        With each order listing, you can include the queries
                      and responses associated with the category and
                      procedure.

                      Enter Y if you want to list the queries and
                      responses associated with each order.
List Patient Orders (3.3)                                             Page 109




                      Enter N if you do not want to list the queries and
                      responses associated with each order.
List Daily Orders (3.4)                                                     Page 110



3.4:   List Daily Orders


Use the List Daily Orders Routine to print a list of all the Daily Orders
entered for a specific patient or at a specific location, on a particular date.
The list is arranged by time of order entry. For each order the report shows
the:

       *   the   patient's name and account number
       *   the   patient's location, room and bed
       *   the   order date and time for the order
       *   the   ordering doctor
       *   the   ordering user
       *   the   category and procedure of the order
       *   the   priority of the order
       *   the   quantity of the order
       *   the   service date and time of the order
       *   the   initiated through date
       *   the   extended until date

If you would like, you can include for each order the queries and responses
associated with the category and procedure.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               List Daily Orders                               |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Location/Patient                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Service Date                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|From Time                                                                      |
|Thru Time                                                                      |
|                                                                               |
|Include Detail                                                                 |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Location/Patient           You can identify a location or a patient. If the
                           mnemonic for a location appears as the default response,
                           you can gain access only to information from that
                           location.

                           If no location appears, enter a mnemonic from the
                           Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that identifies
                           the location for which you want to list unverified
                           orders.

                           NOTE:   Sometimes, no location appears at this prompt and
List Daily Orders (3.4)                                                 Page 111



                             you are nevertheless restricted to a few
                             locations associated with your terminal. In that
                             case, a message appears if you try to enter the
                             name of an inappropriate location:

                                  This device is not associated with that
                                  location.

                      If you want to identify a patient instead of a location,
                      delete the response to this prompt, if any. Enter the
                      letter P, followed by a space, followed by one of these
                      five ways to identify a patient:

                             1 - by account number

                             2 - by unit number
                                 Enter U#, followed by the unit number.

                             3 - by full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,
                                 MIDDLEINITIAL format, using up to 43
                                 characters

                             4 - by partial name

                             5 - by recalling the last patient entered in the
                                 current terminal session
                                 Press the spacebar, then press <RETURN>.


Service Date         At the Service Date prompt, the user enters the date
                     for which orders are to be printed. Use the standard
                     date format or a T combination.


From Time            At the From Time prompt, the user can enter the time
                     for which they would like to begin viewing daily orders
                     for the service date defined.


Thru Time            At the Thru Time prompt, the user can enter the time
                     for which they would like to end viewing daily orders
                     for the service date defined.


Include Detail       With each order listing, you can include the queries
                     and responses associated with the category and
                     procedures.

                     Enter Y if you want to list the queries and responses
                     associated with each order.
List Daily Orders (3.4)                                               Page 112




                     Enter N if you do not want to list the queries and
                     responses associated with each order.
Overdue Renewable Orders (3.5)                                               Page 113



3.5:    Overdue Renewable Orders


Use the Overdue Renewable Orders Routine to print a list of all Renewable
orders for a specific provider that have passed their renewal date. For each
order the report shows:

  *    the   patient's name and account number
  *    the   patient's location, room and bed
  *    the   order renew date
  *    the   category and procedure of the order
  *    the   order number
  *    the   priority of the order
  *    the   quantity of the order
  *    the   service date and time of the order


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                         List Overdue Renewable Orders                         |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Provider                                                                  |
|Through Provider                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|From Location                                                                  |
|Through Location                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Renew Date                                                                     |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


From Provider            At the From Provider prompt, the user may enter the
                         name of the provider for which they would like to begin
                         listing Overdue Renewable Orders for.


Through Provider         At the Through Provider prompt, the user may ente the
                         name of the provider for which they would like to end
                         listing overdue orders for.


From Location            The user may enter the mnemonic from the Location
                         Dictionary of the MIS Module, which identifies a
                         department or patient care area in the health care
                         organization. A Lookup is available.


Through Location         The user may enter the mnemonic from the Location
                         Dictionary of the MIS Module, which identifies a
Overdue Renewable Orders (3.5)                                        Page 114



                     department or patient care area in the health care
                     organization. A Lookup is available.


Renew Date           The date entered at this prompt is the due date of
                     the overdue orders. This will list all renewable orders
                     whose renew date is less than or equal to the specified
                     date.
List Unsigned Orders (3.6)                                              Page 115



3.6:   List Unsigned Orders


Use the Unsigned Orders routine to print a list of all orders which require an
Electronic Signature and have not yet been signed by someone with the necessary
signature authority level.

For each order the report shows:

          *   the patient's name and account number
          *   the patient's location
          *   the category and procedure of the order
          *   the order number
          *   the priority of the order
          *   the quantity of the order
          *   the provider who is required to Electronically Sign the order
          *   the date and time the order was signed (if signed by someone with a
              signature authority level less then needed for the order)


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                             List Unsigned Orders                              |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Order Date                                                                |
|Through Order Date                                                             |
|                                                                               |
|From Location                                                                  |
|Through Location                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


From Order Date        Enter the date for which users would like to list all
                       unsigned orders from. Use the standard date format or a
                       T combination.


Through Order Date     Enter the date for which users would like to list all
                       unsigned orders through. Use the standard date format or
                       a T combination.


From Location          Enter a mnemonic from the Location Dictionary of the
                       MIS Module, which identifies a department or patient
                       care area in the health care organization. The list of
                       unsigned orders will begin with this location. A Lookup
                       is available.
List Unsigned Orders (3.6)                                            Page 116



Through Location     Enter a mnemonic from the Location Dictionary of the
                     MIS Module, which identifies a department or patient care
                     area in the health care organization. The list of
                     unsigned orders will be run through this location. A
                     Lookup is available.
Reprint Orders (3.7)                                                      Page 117



3.7:    Reprint Orders


This routine allows users to identify a specific order and to reprint the data
associated with its placement. Users can edit the format of the
requisition(s), the destination(s) at which requisitions will be printed, and
the number of copies that will be printed.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           Reprint Order's Paperwork                           |
|===============================================================================|
|User                                                                           |
|                                                                               |
|Category                                                                       |
|Order                                                                          |
|                                                                               |
|Patient                                                                        |
|Order Dr                                                                       |
|                                                                               |
|----------------Procedure---------------- ---Service---                        |
|Mnemonic   Name                            Date      Time Pri Qty Status       |
|                                                             4                 |
|                                                                               |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------     |
|                                                                               |
|              Format      Destination      Copies                              |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Category                 Enter the category mnemonic of the order to be
                         reprinted. A Lookup is available to the Category
                         Dictionary. If the terminal is associated with one or
                         more departments, only categories from those departments
                         can be identified. When attempting to enter an
                         inappropriate category, this message appears:

                              This device is not associated with that
                              category's department


Order                    Enter the number of the order to be reprinted.   A
                         Lookup is available.
Reprint Orders (3.7)                                                   Page 118



                       To display a Lookup by date, enter 4 digits representing
                       the month and day or by entering a T combination. For
                       example:

                              Enter 0730 for a Lookup starting with orders
                              entered on July 30

                              Enter T-1 for a Lookup starting with orders
                              entered yesterday

                       After the order is selected, the upper section of the
                       screen displays patient and order information; this
                       information cannot be edited.

                       The lower section of the screen displays printing
                       specifications, if they were set up in the Procedure
                       Dictionary including:

                              - format of the requisition
                              - destination of the copy
                              - number of copies

                       New information can be added or existing data can be
                       edited or deleted.


Format                 The mnemonic of the printing format defined for
                       this procedure in the Procedure Dictionary appears at
                       this prompt, if defined. Press <Enter> to select this
                       format. To reprint the order in a different format,
                       delete the existing mnemonic and enter the mnemonic of
                       the appropriate format. A Lookup is available.

                       Additional formats can be added after the existing
                       formats displayed.


Destination            The mnemonic of the printer defined for this format
                       as defined in the Procedure Dictionary appears at this
                       prompt, if defined. Press <Enter> to reprint the
                       requisition at this printer. To reprint the requisition
                       at a different printer, delete the existing mnemonic and
                       enter the mnemonic of the appropriate printer. A Lookup
                       is available.


Copies                 The number of copies of this format as defined in
                       the Procedure Dictionary is displayed. Press <Enter> to
                       print this number of copies. To print a different
                       number of copies, delete this number and enter the
Reprint Orders (3.7)                                                   Page 119



                       appropriate number of copies to be reprinted.
Order Audit Trail (3.8)                                                Page 120



3.8:   Order Audit Trail


The Order Audit Trail routine lists the activity associated with an order. In
addition to the information which was entered at the time of placing the order,
information regarding the following activities, along with the date, time, and
user, print on this report:

                 * Entering the order

                 * Editing the order's
                   - status
                   - order doctor
                   - service date
                   - service time
                   - priority
                   - quantity
                   - technician
                   - queries

                 * Associating the order with a report

                 * Removing the association with a report

                 * Deleting the order

                 * Verifying or acknowledging the order

                 * Renewing the order

For each event, the Order Audit Trail records the following information:

                 * Date and time the event occurred

                 * User responsible for the change

                 * Brief description of the event, including the old value if
                   the event caused a value to change


Viewing an Order's Historical Detail

When you select the Order Audit Trail routine, you must identify the category
and order number for which you want an audit trail. To identify an order,
enter an eight digit order number in MMDD-NNNN format. To help identify an
order, use one of the following Lookup options:

* Full Lookup - Press the <Lookup> for a list of all orders in the specified
  category.

* Partial Lookup - If you know the patient associated with the order, enter P
  <spacebar> [Patient's name] <Lookup>. The Lookup includes orders belonging
Order Audit Trail (3.8)                                                  Page 121



 the patient in the specified category.


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Order Audit Trail                               |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Category                                                                       |
|                                                                               |
|Order                                                                          |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Category              Enter a mnemonic from the Category Dictionary that
                      identifies the category for which you want to report
                      data. When you enter the mnemonic, the full name of the
                      category appears beside the mnemonic.


Order                 A Lookup of existing orders for the category
                      you entered on the previous prompt is available.

                      Enter <Lookup> to get a list of all orders entered for
                      the category. If you want to display a particular order,
                      and you know the date on which that order was entered,
                      enter the date in the standard format, followed by
                      <Lookup>.

                      For example, for a Lookup of orders entered on July 14,
                      enter 0714<Lookup>. For a order entered yesterday,
                      enter T-1. If you want to display a particular order,
                      and you know the patient for which the order was
                      entered, enter "P", followed by a space, followed by the
                      patient in the standard format, followed by <Lookup>.
                      After choosing which patient you want you will get a
                      list of all orders entered for that patient for the
                      category specified in previous prompt.
Managing Patients' Diets (4)                                           Page 122



Chapter 4:   Managing Patients' Diets


The Order Entry Module contains a number of routines that permit users to
manage patients' diets. Some of the routines are accessible from both Care
Areas and Departments. Others are restricted for use only in Departments. Care
Areas include locations responsible for patient care, such as nursing stations.
Departments include locations responsible for administering diets, such as the
Dietary or Nutrition Departments.

Orders for diets differ from other orders in two ways:

         *   The categeory of the diet order must be defined in the Category
             Dictionary as a D type.

         *   At the TIME prompt, users must enter the abbreviation for the
             meal at which the diet should start (B, L, or D), instead of the
             time.

Users may enter patient dietary data via two routines:

         *   Enter Care Area Orders - this routine allows you to enter orders
             for any test or treatment related to patient care. You can use
             this routine to enter orders for new or modified diets.

         *   Enter/Edit Patient Dietary Data - the main dietary routine, this
             routine collects all pertinent dietary data, such as food
             preferences, intolerances, and allergies.

             The upper portion of the screen for this routine displays
             administrative data from the patient's file, such as age, sex,
             height, weight, and location. The lower portion of the screen
             displays customer-defined queries, as well as any responses that
             have been made to the queries. The customer-defined queries can
             be location-specific. They are defined in the Location Dictionary
             of the MIS Module, at the ORDER ENTRY prompt forDIET
             SCREENS-INPUT.


Allowing Users to View But Not Edit Dietary Data

Your facility may want to allow certain groups of users to view patients'
dietary data, but not to change it. For this purpose, there is a View
Dietary Data Routine. This routine allows users to view the information
entered through the Enter/Edit Dietary Data Routine, but not to edit it.


Viewing Patients' Diets by Location

Nursing staff at a specific location may want to see a list of the diets that
are currently in effect for all patients at that location. They can do so
through the List Current Diet Routine, which displays or prints a list of the
Managing Patients' Diets (4)                                           Page 123



current diet for each patient at a location. The list includes the date on
which the diet became effective, and the number of days that it has been in
effect.


Viewing Patients' Dietary History

Users can also view the diets ordered for a specific patient throughout his
or her stay in the hospital. The Print Patient's Dietary History Routine shows
each diet that was ordered throughout a patient's stay and when it became
effective -- giving the actual date and the day of the patient's stay
represented by that date.


How Long a Diet Can Be In Effect

In the Dietary Procedure Dictionary, a facility can define a review time for
each diet. When a patient has been on that diet for longer than the specified
review time, the name of the diet and the patient's name show up on the Diet
Review Report. This report can be displayed or printed through the Print Diet
Review Report Routine.


Holding and Releasing a Patient's Meal Tray

You may find it necessary to delay a patient's meal tray delivery if, for
example, the patient is scheduled for a test at meal delivery time. You could
schedule the meal to be held, and then released at the time that the patient is
expected back on the floor. You can delay meal tray delivery by responding to
the HOLD TRAY prompts in the Enter/Edit Dietary Data routine.

You can set up your system to automatically notify Dietary personnel about the
held meal via an OA message. To set up automatic OA notification of a held
meal, do the following:

         1.   define an OA message in the MIS OA Message Dictionary. The
              message should include the fact that a meal is being held. If
              desired you can include MIS data fields to indicate the date,
              meal, and release time of the meal.

              For example, the message might say "Please hold patient's [f oe
              hold tray meal] for [f hold tray date]. Please release tray at
              [f oe tray release time]."

         2.   ask your MEDITECH applications consultant to enter the hold tray
              message mnemonic in the HOLD TRAY MESSAGE prompt in the OE
              Parameters.

A held meal is designated on the following dietary reports by the flag *H*
beside the patient's name.

         * Print Patient's Dietary History
Managing Patients' Diets (4)                                           Page 124



         * List Current Diets

         * List Diet Changes

After the specified release time, the hold tray information no longer appears
on the Dietary Data Screen, and the patient's name is not flagged with *H*
on the dietary reports.


Printing Meal Counts and Labels

The Nutrition or Dietary Department is the most likely candidate to use the
routines for printing meal counts and printing labels for meals and snacks.

A meal count lists the quantity of each diet ordered for a specific meal on a
specific date. It can be printed for the entire facility, or for a specific
location.

Labels can be printed for meal trays or for trays bearing nourishment snacks.
The labels identify the recipient of a meal or snack, by name and by room and
bed numbers. They can be printed for the entire facility, for a range of
locations, or for a single location.


What Happens to Dietary Data Upon Patient's Discharge

Dietary orders with effective times prior to the discharge time remain in the
system, and are available for viewing and printing via the Diet History Report
or the Dietary Data Report.

The following events occur automatically upon a patient's discharge:

         *   a "cancelled" requisition prints at the printer associated with
             any future dietary orders

         *   in the Review Orders Routine, the status of any future dietary
             order changes to CNC

         *   future diets disappear from the Enter/Edit Patient's Dietary Data
             Routine

         *   future diets do not print on the patient's Dietary History Report

         *   the patient's name appears on the List Diet Changes Report with a
             D (for discharged), and no current diet listed.
Managing Patients' Diets (4)                                           Page 125



Distinguishing Between Current, Primary and Concurrent Diets

MEDITECH uses the terms current, primary, and concurrent diets in
dietary routines. The following section describes these three dietary terms.

Current Diet

A patient's current diet is the diet for the next scheduled meal (i.e., a
meal whose start time has not passed). Each meal has an end time, specified at
the MEAL TIME prompt in the OE Parameters. For example, assume that
breakfast is defined as 8:30 a.m., and lunch is defined as 12:00 noon. If you
print meal labels at 11:00 a.m., lunch is considered the current diet, and this
diet prints on the meal labels.

Primary and Concurrent Diets

Every patient is assigned a diet upon admission. This original diet is
considered to be the paitent's primary diet. Health care personnel may
change the primary diet an unlimited number of times. A new primary diet
always cancels the existing primary diet.

You may find it necessary to add another diet to a patient's primary diet for
the same meal. For example, assume that a patient is assigned a bland diet for
the next meal, but the clinician also wishes to restrict salt intake. To
accommodate more than one diet for the same meal, you must designate each diet
as either a primary or concurrent diet. A concurrent diet adds to, but
does not replace the primary diet. An unlimited number of concurrent diets may
be entered for a patient.
Allowing Users to Modify a Diet (4.1)                                       Page 126



4.1:   Allowing Users to Modify a Diet


To allow users to modify a patient's diet, use the Enter Care Area Orders
Routine, and choose one of the following methods:

          *    Set up a Special Modifications query at the category or
               procedure level and enter the second diet as a special
               modification.

          *    Set up your system to allow users to designate primary and
               concurrent diets.

If your system is set up appropriately, you can also allow order entry users to
add or change dosage instructions for dietary supplements. You must first
defined a formula query containing the dosage instructions, and attach the
query to the dietary procedure screen. The following sections describes all
three methods of modifying a patient's diet.


Modifying Diets Via a Special Modifications Query

The example being used in this section will be a patient on a bland diet who
also needs a salt-restricted diet.

You can set up a customer-defined query asking for special dietary
modifications and place this query at the category or procedure level. When
entering the dietary order for the bland diet, the user indicates the low salt
diet as a response to the special modifications query. The original diet is
being modified or added to, and the original bland diet remains intact.


Modifying Diets by Allowing Concurrent Diets

The other method of allowing users to modify diets requires the user to assign
each diet a primary or concurrent status.

Setting Up Your System to Allow Primary and Concurrent Diets

To allow user to designate primary and concurrent diets in your system:

          1.    In the MIS Query Dictionary, define two queries referring to the
                diet's primary or concurrent status. The first query should say
                something to this effect: "Is this a concurrent diet?" The
                second query should say something like "Is this the primary
                diet?" or "Add this diet to the previous diet?"

          2.    In the MIS Customer-Defined Screen Dictionary, build
                customer-defined screens for each query, and add the screens to
                the category or procedure level for a dietary order.

          3.    Ask you MEDITECH applications consultant to enter the mnemonics
Allowing Users to Modify a Diet (4.1)                                    Page 127



                of the appropriate dietary queries at the PRIMARY DIET and
                CONCURRENT DIET prompts in the OE parameters.


When you enter the diets via this method you must indicate whether a diet
replaces the patient's primary diet, or adds to it. You designate the diet as
primary or concurrent by responding to the customer-defined queries.

           *   If primary diet:          the new diet replaces the patient's
                                         original diet

           *   If concurrent diet:       the new diet is added to the
                                         patient's primary diet


Entering Primary and Concurrent Diets

You enter a separate order for each diet. Using the same scenario described
previously, the bland diet is the patient's primary diet and the low salt diet
is the concurrent diet. The low salt diet adds to, but does not replace the
primary diet.

Entering the Primary Diet (Bland Diet)

                           Is This a Concurrent Diet?   N
                           Is This the Primary Diet?    Y

A N response to the first query, indicates that the bland diet is not a
concurrent diet and should not be added to any current diets. This is a new
diet order for the patient and any previous diets for the same meal should be
cancelled. A Y response to the second query indicates that no matter how
many concurrent diets exist, the bland diet is the primary diet.

Entering the Concurrent Diet (Low Salt Diet)

                           Is This a Concurrent Diet?   Y
                           Is This the Primary Diet?    N

To create a concurrent diet for the same meal, you enter a second order for the
low salt diet. The first query should have a Y response, since the diet
exists concurrently with the bland diet. The second query should have a N
response, since the low salt diet is not the patient's primary diet.
Using this method, any primary diet cancels the existing primary diet.

NOTE:   If you modify diets by assigning primary and concurrent diets, only the
        primary diet is counted in the Meal Count and the Meal Count by Location
        Report.


Using Formulas to Enter Dietary Supplements

A formula is a set of dosage instructions for administering a patient's dietary
supplement. Your health care organization can use queries containing formulas
Allowing Users to Modify a Diet (4.1)                                    Page 128



to enter and update patient's dietary restrictions.    A dietary formula could
contain the following information:

         *    the supplement's name
         *    amount to be administered
         *    dosage interval

For example, a typical formula for the dietary supplement Isocal might real
1/2 Strength Isocal, 50 cc/hr.

If your health care organization uses formulas, you place a formula in a
comment-type query, then attach the query to both the patient's Dietary Data
Screen and the Dietary Procedure Screen for any diet that uses formulas. When
an order entry user enters a diet procedure with a formula query attached, the
existing formula information appears on the order entry screen. When a user
changes the formula in one routine, the other routine automatically reflects
the updated formula.

For example, assume that a dietician prescribes the formula 1/2 Strength
Isocal, 50 cc/hr. A dietary clerk might enter the formula in a query on
the patient's Dietary Data Screen. The system stores the formula with the
Dietary Data Screen. Order Entry users can view and edit the formula while
entering a new diet for the patient, and the updated formula appears on the
Dietary Data Screen.

Setting Your System to Accommodate Dietary Formula Queries

Follow these steps to set up dietary formulas appropriately.

         1.    In the MIS Query Dictionary, define a comment-type query. The
               text of the query could be something like DIETARY FORMULA:
               You may define up to two queries to hold dietary formulas.

         2.    Have your MEDITECH Applications Consultant enter the query's
               mnemonic at the Order Entry DIET FORMULA #1 parameter. If
               you define a second formula query, that query mnemonic should
               appear at the Order Entry DIET FORMULA #2 parameter.

         3.    Attach the formula query to both the Dietary Data Screen and the
               Dietary Procedure Screen.

Attaching a Formula Query to the Dietary Data Screen

         1.    In the MIS Module, create an OE PAT1 type customer-defined
               screen via the Enter/Edit Customer-Defined Screen Routine. This
               screen should include the Formula queries defined in the OE
               parameters.

         2.    In the MIS Location Dictionary, identify a Care Area Location
               and, at the DIET INPUT SCREEN prompt, identify the
               customer-defined screen containing the formula queries.

Attaching a Formula Query to the Dietary Procedure Screen
Allowing Users to Modify a Diet (4.1)                                  Page 129




         1.   In the MIS Module, create an OE PROC type customer-defined screen
              via the Enter/Edit Customer-Defined Screen Routine. This screen
              should contain the Formula queries defined in the OE Parameters.

         2.   In the OE Dietary Procedure Dictionary, identify the procedure
              and, at the CARE AREA SCREEN prompt, identify the
              customer-defined screen containing the formula queries.
Summary:   Managing Patients' Diets (4.2)                                Page 130



4.2:   Summary:   Managing Patients' Diets


The following table summarizes the main tasks you can perform related to
managing patients' diets, and the routine that helps you accomplish each task.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                Managing Patients' Diets: Tasks and Routines
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    To Perform This Function                  Use

    Enter or edit information about a         Enter/Edit Patient's Dietary Data
    patient's dietary preferences:
    likes, dislikes, intolerances,
    allergies, etc.


    View a patient's dietary data, as         View Dietary Data
    entered through the Enter/Edit
    Patient's Dietary Data Routine


    List current diets for all patients       List Current Diets
    at a location

    List by location the patients and         List Diet Changes
    outpatients who have had diet changes

    List all patients on a specific diet,     List Patients on a Diet
    either for a location or a range of
    inpatient or outpatient locations

    List all diets ordered for a              Print Patient's Dietary History
    specific patient during his
    or her stay


    List all diets that have been             Print Diet Review Report
    in effect longer than the
    specified review time


    Print a count of all diets ordered        Print Meal Count
    for a particular date and meal


    Print a count of all diets ordered        Print Meal Count by Location
    for a particular date and meal from
    a location or group of locations
Summary:   Managing Patients' Diets (4.2)                               Page 131



   Print labels for all diets ordered        Print Meal Labels
   for a particular date, meal and
   kitchen, from a location or group
   of locations

   Print a full day's meal labels for        Print Meal Labels for a Day
   a particular date, location or patient

   Print labels for all nourishments         Print Nourishment Labels
   ordered from a location or group
   of locations

   Print a record of the admission,          Print Location Activity Report
   discharge and transfer activity of a
   location or a range of locations

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Enter/Edit Patient's Dietary Data (4.3)                                Page 132



4.3:   Enter/Edit Patient's Dietary Data


Use this routine to enter or edit patient diet information including: food
preferences, intolerances, allergies, etc.

After you identify the patient, administrative data on file for that patient
appears above the white line on the screen. You cannot edit this data, which
includes age and sex, location, diets, room and bed numbers, admission date,
status, height and weight. If a temporary location is on file for the patient,
that appears also.

Additional health care organization-defined prompts can display on this screen.
The health care organization-defined prompts are attached in the Location
Dictionary of the MIS Module at the DIET SCREEN INPUT prompt.

Information entered for dietary restrictions using dietary formulas can be
displayed on this screen in the form of a query. The dietary formula queries
must be defined in the Order Entry parameters to use this functionality. If
the dietary formula queries are answered while placing orders, the queries will
automatically update the formula information on the patient's Dietary
Administrative Data screen. Please refer to the Allowing Users to Modify a
Diet section of the documentation for further details on Formula Queries.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Enter/Edit Patient Dietary Data                              |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                                         2.2        Admit            |
|Temporary Location                                        Loc              Status           |
|                                                          Rm                                |
|Diets                                                     Bd               Unit #           |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                               Ht             in            |
|Hold Tray: Date           Meal           se                    Wt        8    oz          g |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Patient                Identify the patient to enter or edit dietary
                       data for. Restricted users can identify only patients at
                       the location of terminal being worked from.


                       NOTE:   To view the dietary data for several patients
                               at one location in succession, enter the letter
                               L, followed by a space, followed by the mnemonic
                               for the location. For more information, please
                               see "Looping through a Location" at the PATIENT
Enter/Edit Patient's Dietary Data (4.3)                                     Page 133



                                    prompt in the Review Orders (by order date)
                                    Routine.


Delaying a Patient's Meal Tray Delivery

The only prompts on the upper portion of this screen that you can edit are in
the HOLD TRAY section. Your responses to these three prompts allow you to
prevent a meal tray from being delivered to the patient for a specified length
of time. You can schedule a meal to be held, and then released at a time that
the patient is expected back on the nursing floor.

If you hold a patient's meal, but fail to enter a release time, the meal is
held until the following day unless a user manually releases the meal.

After you place a patient's meal on hold, the hold tray information appears on
the Diet History Report. Also, an *H* flag precedes the patient's name on
the following:

            *   Current Diets reports

            *   Diet Changes reports

            *   meal and nourishment labels

For example, the name SMITH,MARJORIE appears as:

                                *H* SMITH,MARJORIE


HOLD TRAY
  Date            To hold a patient's meal, enter the date on which the meal
                  should be held.

                  To avoid holding a meal for the current patient, leave this
                  prompt blank. If you do not enter a response, the cursor
                  bypasses the next two prompts.


  Meal            Enter the first letter of the meal that should be held.
                  The choices are:

                  *   B(reakfast)
                  *   L(unch)
                  *   D(inner)

                  This field is required if you enter a date.

  Release         Enter the time the patient's meal tray should be
                  released. You are not required to enter a release time.
Enter/Edit Patient's Dietary Data (4.3)                               Page 134



               However, if you bypass this prompt, the patient's meal does not
               release until a user manually removes the hold data.
View Dietary Data (4.4)                                                    Page 135



4.4:   View Dietary Data


This routine allows patient dietary data entered through the Enter/Edit
Patient Dietary Data Routine to be viewed. This information can not be edited
from this routine. This routine is only for viewing.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                     View Dietary Data                                      |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                                       2.2         Admit             |
|Temporary Location                                       Loc              Status            |
|                                                         Rm                                 |
|Diets                                                    Bd               Unit #            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                              Ht              in            |
|Hold Tray: Date           Meal          se                    Wt          8   oz            |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Patient                Identify the patient to view dietary data.
                       Restricted users can only identify patients at the
                       location of the terminal being worked from.

                           NOTE:    To view data for several patients at one
                                    location in succession, enter the letter L
                                    followed by a space, followed by the mnemonic
                                    for the location. For more information, please
                                    see "Looping through a Location" at the PATIENT
                                    prompt in the Review Orders (by order date)
                                    Routine.


After the patient has been identified, the following patient information
defaults onto the screen:

                           *   Age and Sex (A/S)
                           *   Location
                           *   Registration Date
                           *   Status
                           *   Unit Number
                           *   Current Room and Bed
                           *   Temporary Location
                           *   Hold Tray
                           *   Height and Weight

This information can not be edited from this routine.
View Dietary Data (4.4)                                                Page 136




Additional Health Care Organization-defined prompts can display on this screen.
The Health Care Organization-defined prompts are attached in the Location
Dictionary of the MIS Module with a Customer Defined Screen.

If the queries have been responded to, the responses will display. The queries
are answered in the Enter/Edit Dietary Data Routine. Responses can not be
entered or edited from this view-only routine.
List Current Diets - Single Location (4.5)                                Page 137



4.5:   List Current Diets - Single Location


The List Current Diets Routine prints a list of the diets currently in effect
for all patients at a specific location. The list includes:

           *   room and bed number      * number of days diet has been in effect
           *   diet name                * patient's account number
           *   effective date of diet   * patient's name
           *   dietary allergies

The patient's height in feet and inches and the weight in pounds and ounces
displays on the Current Diet Report in addition to the height and weight in
metric.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                              List Current Diets                               |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Location                                                                       |
|                                                                               |
|Date                                                                           |
|                                                                               |
|Meal                                                                           |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Include Order Queries?                                                         |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Location                 Enter the mnemonic of the location to enter
                         requisitions for. A Lookup to the MIS Location
                         Dictionary is available.

                         The full description of the location defaults in next to
                         the mnemonic when the location is chosen.

                         If the terminal is managed, the default location is the
                         location of the terminal. This location can be deleted
                         and another location can be defined, if appropriate.


Date                     Enter the date for which to print current diets,
                         using the standard format (a T combination or DD/MM/YY).


Meal                     Enter the abbreviation for the meal for which to
                         print current diets:
List Current Diets - Single Location (4.5)                            Page 138



                            B   - Breakfast
                            L   - Lunch
                            D   - Dinner


Include Order Queries? To include queries from the orders for the diets on
                       on this list, enter Y.

                      To not include queries from the orders for the diets on
                      this list, enter N.
List Current Diets - Multiple Locations (4.6)                           Page 139



4.6:   List Current Diets - Multiple Locations


The List Current Diets Routine prints a list of the diets currently in effect
for all patients at a range of locations. The list includes:

          *   room and bed number      * number of days diet has been in effect
          *   diet name                * patient's account number
          *   effective date of diet   * patient's name
          *   dietary allergies

The patient's height in feet and inches and the weight in pounds and ounces
displays on the Current Diet Report in addition to the height and weight in
metric.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                              List Current Diets                               |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Location                                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Location                                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|Date                                                                           |
|                                                                               |
|Meal                                                                           |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Include Order Queries?                                                         |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


From Location           Press <Enter> to have the list of current diets
Beginning               begin at the first entry in the Location Dictionary.
                        To begin at a different location, delete BEGINNING and
                        enter the mnemonic of the location to begin the list
                        with. A Lookup of locations from the MIS Locations
                        Dictionary is available.


Thru Location           Press <Enter> to end with the last entry in the
End                     Location Dictionary. To end the list with a
                        different location, delete END and enter the mnemonic of
                        the location to end the list with. A Lookup of
                        locations from the MIS Location Dictionary is available.


Date                    Enter the date to print the current diets list for
                        using the standard format or a T combination.
List Current Diets - Multiple Locations (4.6)                           Page 140



Meal                  Enter the meal for which to print the Current Diets
                      Report:

                            B   - Breakfast
                            L   - Lunch
                            D   - Dinner


Include Order Queries? Enter Y to include the queries associated with
                       the diets on the list.

                      Enter N to not include the queries associated with
                      diets on the list.
List Diet Changes (4.7)                                                 Page 141



4.7:   List Diet Changes


Use this report to list by location the patients and outpatients who have had
diet changes. This report can help dietary personnel remain informed when
patients require new diets.

Also, if specified to include New Diets, Transfers and Discharges, the report
includes patients who had their first diet ordered, patients who transferred
from one location to another (if the location transferred to was an inpatient
location), and/or patients who were discharged in the time period from the
previous meal to the meal specified. Patients who were transferred are listed
under their new location, room and bed. Patients who were discharged display
under their pre-discharge location, room and bed.

For each location, patients appear in room/bed order.   For each patient, the
report includes the following:

          *   patient name
          *   room and bed
          *   account number
          *   first letter of the type of diet change (listed below)
          *   name of patient's current diet for the specified meal
          *   the first 34 characters of the response to the query specified in
              the DIETARY TO PRINT OE parameter
          *   name of patient's previous diet(s) for the specified meal

If any meals are on hold, an *H* flag precedes the patient's name.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                           Types of Diet Changes
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Value in CHANGE Column         Explanation of the Diet Change

         C                     Patient's current diet was designated
                               concurrent with his/her previous diet(s) on
                               the specified date

         D                     Patient was discharged before the specified
                               meal (no previous diets listed)

         N                     Patient's current diet is new starting on
                               the specified date (no previous diets listed)

         T                      Patient was transferred before the specified
                                meal (no previous diets listed)

         S                     Patient's current diet superceded his/her
                               previous diet on the specified date

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
List Diet Changes (4.7)                                                 Page 142




+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                              Diet Changes Report                              |
|===============================================================================|
|From Location                                                                  |
|Thru Location                                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|Date                       Include: New Diets?                                 |
|                                     Transfers?                                |
|Meal                                 Discharges?                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


From Location         Press <Enter> to have the list of diet changes
Beginning             begin at the first entry in the Location Dictionary.
                      To begin at a different location, delete BEGINNING and
                      enter the mnemonic of the location to begin the list
                      with. A Lookup of locations from the MIS Location
                      Dictionary is available.


Thru Location         Press <Enter> to end with the last entry in the
End                   Location Dictionary. To end the list with a
                      different location, delete END and enter the mnemonic of
                      the location to end the list with. A Lookup of
                      locations from the MIS Location Dictionary is available.


Date                  Enter the date to print the diet changes list for
                      using the standard format or a T combination.


Meal                  Enter the meal for which to print the List Diet
                      Changes Report:

                           B   - Breakfast
                           L   - Lunch
                           D   - Dinner


New Diets?            Enter Y to include patients whose diets have
                      been modified between the specified meal and the
                      previous meal.


Transfers?            Enter Y to include patient's who have
                      transferred from one location to another between the
                      specified meal and the previous meal.
List Diet Changes (4.7)                                                   Page 143



Discharges?           Enter Y to   include   patients who have been
                      discharged   between   the specified meal and the previous
                      meal. The    name of   each discharged patient appears on
                      the report   with no   diets listed.
List Patients on a Diet (4.8)                                           Page 144



4.8:   List Patients on a Diet


Use this routine to list all patients on a specific diet, either for a location
or a range of inpatient or outpatient locations at your health care
organization. This report is useful for statistical purposes, and for helping
dietary personnel plan resource allocation.

The printed report includes separate pages for each location, sorted by
location mnemonic. For each location, patients appear in room/bed order.    For
each patient, the report includes the following information:

          *   patient name
          *   room and bed
          *   account number
          *   the first 34 characters of the response to the query specified in
              the DIETARY TO PRINT OE parameter, which is typically the
              "Special Modifications" query.

If any meals are on hold, an *H* flag precedes the patient's name.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                            List Patients On A Diet                            |
|===============================================================================|
|From Location:                                                                 |
|Thru Location:                                                                 |
|                                                                               |
|For Category:                                                                  |
|For Procedure:                                                                 |
|                                                                               |
|For Date:                                                                      |
|                                                                               |
|For Meal:                                                                      |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


From Location           Press <Enter> to have the list of diet changes
Beginning               begin at the first entry in the Location Dictionary.
                        To begin at a different location, delete BEGINNING and
                        enter the mnemonic of the location to begin the list
                        with. A Lookup of locations from the MIS Location
                        Dictionary is available.


Thru Location           Press <Enter> to end with the last entry in the
End                     Location Dictionary. To end the list with a
                        different location, delete END and enter the mnemonic of
                        the location to end the list with. A Lookup of
                        locations from the MIS Location Dictionary is available.
List Patients on a Diet (4.8)                                              Page 145



Category              Enter the mnemonic of Diet-Type Category to run
                      List Patient on Diets Report for. A lookup to the
                      Diet-Type Categories is available. The full name of the
                      category defaults beside the mnemonic when the category
                      is identified.




Procedure             Enter a procedure mnemonic from the specified
                      category to run the List Patient on Diet Report for.
                      A Lookup of procedures in the selected category is
                      available.

                      NOTE:       The following methods are available in
                                  addition to the standard Lookup:

                                                 Full          Partial
                      LOOKUP Method              LOOKUP        LOOKUP

                      alphabetically by           <Lookup>     [chars]<Lookup>
                      procedure name                           (e.g., EL<Lookup>)

                      numerically by             #<Lookup>     #[num]<Lookup>
                      procedure number                         (e.g., #500<Lookup>)

                      Wildcard by word                         *[word or phrase]
                      or phrase                                <Lookup>
                                                               (e.g., *NA)


Date                  Enter the date to print the List Patients on Diet
                      Report for using the standard format or a T combination.


Meal                  Enter the meal for which to print the List Patients
                      on Diet Report:

                              B    - Breakfast
                              L    - Lunch
                              D    - Dinner
Print Patient's Dietary History (4.9)                                       Page 146



4.9:   Print Patient's Dietary History


Use this routine to view the diets ordered for a specific patient throughout
his/her stay. In addition to basic administrative patient data, the report
includes:

          *   Each diet that has been ordered
          *   The meal for which the diet was ordered
          *   The effective date of the diet
          *   The day of the patient's stay on which the diet was ordered
          *   The diet's mnemonic and description

In addition, the report identifies if the diet was the primary or concurrent
diet and the user that entered the diet including any comments that were
entered with the diet.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                              Print Diet History                               |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Patient                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Patient                  Identify the patient to view dietary history for.
                         Restricted users can identify only patients at the
                         location of terminal being worked from.
Print Diet Review Report (4.10)                                        Page 147



4.10:   Print Diet Review Report


This routine prints a list of all diets that have been in effect for longer
than the review time defined for the diet at the REVIEW IN DAYS prompt in
the Dietary Procedure Dictionary.

The Diet Review Report is sorted by diet and includes the following
information:

          *   each diet that has been ordered

          *   the effective day of the diet

          *   the meal for which the diet was ordered

          *   the number of review days for that diet

          *   the number of days on that diet

          *   the patient's length of stay

          *   the patient's account number and name

          *   the patient's room and attending provider
Print Meal Count (4.11)                                               Page 148



4.11:   Print Meal Count


This routine prints the total number of diets ordered for a specific meal on a
specific date. In addition, the report shows the grand total of all diets
ordered for that meal throughout the hospital.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Print Meal Count                                |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Date                                                                       |
|                                                                               |
|For Meal                                                                       |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Date                   Enter the date to print the meal count for using
                       the standard format or a T combination.


For Meal               Enter the meal for which to print the meal count
                       for:

                            B   - Breakfast
                            L   - Lunch
                            D   - Dinner
Print Meal Count by Location (4.12)                                    Page 149



4.12:   Print Meal Count by Location


This routine prints a list, by location, of the number of each diet ordered for
a specific meal on a specific date. It can be run for one location or for a
range of locations. In addition to the count for each diet, the report
provides a total of diets ordered for each location and a grand total for all
specified locations.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                         Print Meal Count By Location                          |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Date                                                                       |
|                                                                               |
|For Meal                                                                       |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|From Location                                                                  |
|Thru Location                                                                  |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


For Date               Enter the date to print the meal count by location
                       for using the standard format or a T combination.


For Meal               Enter the meal for which to print the meal count by
                       location for:

                                  B    - Breakfast
                                  L    - Lunch
                                  D    - Dinner


From Location          Press <Enter> to have the meal count begin at the
Beginning              first entry in the Location Dictionary. To begin
                       at a different location, delete BEGINNING and enter the
                       mnemonic of the location to begin the count for. A
                       Lookup of locations from the MIS Location Dictionary is
                       available.


Thru Location          Press <Enter> to end with the last entry in the
End                    Location Dictionary. To end the count with a
                       different location, delete END and enter the mnemonic of
                       the location to end the count with. A Lookup of
                       locations from the MIS Location Dictionary is available.
Print Meal Labels (4.13)                                               Page 150



4.13:   Print Meal Labels


Use this routine to print labels, by location, for meals ordered. The labels
can be printed for all locations, for a range of locations, for one location,
or for a patient.

If your Order Entry parameters are set up appropriately, meal labels can
include the patient's current diet and the label's print date. Please contact
your MEDITECH applications consultant for more information.


Identifying Concurrent Diets and Held Meals on Meal Labels

For patients with concurrent diets, the name of the primary diet is preceded by
the number of concurrent diets. For example, to indicate a primary diet of
clear liquids with 2 concurrent diets, the label would say "(2) CLEAR LIQUIDS"
as indicated on Mary Malloy's meal label in the illustration below.

If the patient is at a temporary location at mealtime, the temporary room and
bed information appears in parentheses. In the illustration below, Mary
Malloy's temporary location is 112-L.

If a meal is on hold, an *H* flag precedes the patient's name, as indicated
on Kristin Thompson's meal label below.


                      (112-L)           MALLOY,MARY
                      01/24/99          (2) CLEAR LIQUIDS


                      112-R       *H*   THOMPSON,KRISTIN
                      01/24/99          HOUSE DIET


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Print Meal Labels                               |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Location                                                                  |
|Thru Location                                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|Patient                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


From Location          Press <Enter> to have the meal labels begin at the
Beginning              first entry in the Location Dictionary. To begin
                       at a different location, delete BEGINNING and enter the
Print Meal Labels (4.13)                                              Page 151



                      mnemonic of the location to begin the list with. A
                      Lookup of locations from the MIS Locations Dictionary is
                      available.


Thru Location         Press <Enter> to end with the last entry in the
End                   Location Dictionary. To end the labels with a
                      different location, delete END and enter the mnemonic of
                      the location to end the labels with. A Lookup of
                      locations from the MIS Location Dictionary is available.


Patient               Identify the patient to print meal labels for.
                      Restricted users can only identify patients at the
                      location of the terminal being worked from.
Print Meal Labels for a Day (4.14)                                     Page 152



4.14:   Print Meal Labels for a Day


This routine prints a day's worth of meal labels (one for each meal) by
location or by patient. The labels can be run for all locations, for a range of
locations, for one location, or for a patient.

To print a day's worth of meal labels (one for each meal) for one patient,
delete the BEGINNING location and the cursor defaults to the PATIENT prompt.

NOTE: If the patient has a primary and concurrent diet, the primary diet is
      displayed on the meal label with a (#) to identify how many concurrent
      diets the patient has.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                          Print Meal Labels For A Day                          |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Location                                                                  |
|Thru Location                                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|Patient                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


From Location          Press <Enter> to have the meal labels by day begin
Beginning              at the first entry in the Location Dictionary. To
                       begin at a different location, delete BEGINNING and
                       enter the mnemonic of the location to begin the list
                       with. A Lookup of locations from the MIS Locations
                       Dictionary is available.


Thru Location          Press <Enter> to end with the last entry in the
End                    Location Dictionary. To end the labels with a
                       different location, delete END and enter the mnemonic of
                       the location to end the labels with. A Lookup of
                       locations from the MIS Location Dictionary is available.


Patient                Identify the patient to print meal labels for.
                       Restricted users can identify only patients at the
                       location of terminal being worked from.
Print Nourishment Labels (4.15)                                        Page 153



4.15:   Print Nourishment Labels


Use this routine to print labels, by location, for nourishments ordered for
patients' between-meal snacks. You can specify a location or a range of
locations, and the snack for which you want printed labels: AM - morning, PM -
afternoon, or HS - before bedtime.

The information for the labels is drawn from the nourishment data entered in
the Enter/Edit Patient Dietary Data Routine.

If your Order Entry parameters are set up appropriately, the nourishment label
can include the patient's current diet, and the label's print date as well as
the patient's nourishment information. The label also displays an *H* flag
beside the patient's name if the patient's meal is being held. If the room and
bed information appears in parentheses, the patient is at a temporary location.

The following illustration depicts a sample nourishment label for the morning
nourishment for the patient Mary Malloy. Note that the label has room for four
queries below the patient's room-bed information. The patient's room and bed
information is in parentheses, indicating that 112-L is her temporary location.

Sample Nourishment Labels


                    (112-L)          MALLOY,MARY          AM
                    Milk
                    Cookies
                    Juice
                    Fruit
                    High Fiber                       01/05/99


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           Print Nourishment Labels                            |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Location                                                                  |
|Thru Location                                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|Patient                                                                        |
|                                                                               |
|For Nourishment                                                                |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


From Location          Press <Enter> to have the nourishment labels begin
Beginning              at the first entry in the Location Dictionary. To
                       begin at a different location, delete BEGINNING and
Print Nourishment Labels (4.15)                                       Page 154



                      enter the mnemonic of the location to begin the labels
                      with. A Lookup of locations from the MIS Locations
                      Dictionary is available.


Thru Location         Press <Enter> to end with the last entry in the
End                   Location Dictionary. To end the labels with a
                      different location, delete END and enter the mnemonic of
                      the location to end the labels with. A Lookup of
                      locations from the MIS Location Dictionary is available.


Patient               Identify the patient to print nourishment labels
                      for. Restricted users can identify only patients at
                      the location of terminal being worked from.
Viewing Patient Results (5)                                            Page 155



Chapter 5:   Viewing Patient Results


Authorized personnel can view results of tests after orders have been entered
for a patient, the appropriate tests or procedures administered, and test
results entered. The method of obtaining data electronically varies.

There are three methods of obtaining results electronically:

     * through the View Patient's Record Routine

     * through the Lab Inquiry Routine and the Pathology Inquiry Routine

     * through the Departmental Option


The Patient Care Inquiry Option

Data from other MEDITECH modules in a Health Care Information System can be
viewed through the PCI Module.

Test results are available in PCI in graphic and tabular form, and they can be
printed.


The Lab Inquiry Routine and the Pathology Inquiry Routine

The Lab Inquiry Routine connects users directly to the Lab Module, through
which they can view results of patients' Blood Bank, Laboratory, and
Microbiology tests. The Pathology Inquiry Routine connects users directly to
the Pathology Module, through which they can view results of patients'
pathology tests. Both summary and detailed data are available from those
modules, but the graphic and tabular capabilities of the PCI Module are not
available.


The Departmental Option

Results of tests from departments such as Cardiology and Physical Therapy,
which do not have separate modules, are available through the Departmental
Option as well as through PCI. Please see documentation for the Departmental
Option for additional information.
View Patient's Record (5.1)                                            Page 156



5.1:   View Patient's Record


Identify a patient and view the patient's record in the Patient Care Inquiry
Module. For more information, please see the User Manual for the Patient Care
Inquiry Option.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                             View Patient's Record                             |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Patient                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT                Identify the patient to view in the Patient Care
                       Inquiry (PCI) Module. Restricted users can only identify
                       patients at the location of the terminal being worked
                       from.
MEDITECH Lab Inquiry (5.2)                                             Page 157



5.2:   MEDITECH Lab Inquiry


The MEDITECH Lab Inquiry Routine allows patient's Blood Bank, Laboratory and
Microbiology test results to be viewed directly from the $T Laboratory Module
if this module is set up for the Order Entry database.

At the patient prompt, identify the patient to view results for. Three methods
are available for viewing test results from this routine:

            1. Patient Result Inquiry
            2. Patient Result Inquiry by Test
            3. Blood Bank Transfusion Inquiry

Patient Result Inquiry views results of all tests done for a specific patient
in the Laboratory, Microbiology, and Blood Bank departments. This is
particularly useful for a comprehensive review of a patient's test results.

Patient Result Inquiry by Test reviews results of a specific test or tests for
a specific patient over a selected period of time. This option provides a
means of observing trends in results of the same test over a period of time,
and is particularly useful for monitoring therapies such as heparin, insulin or
chemotherapy.

The Blood Bank Transfusion Inquiry views results of blood requested for
transfusion.

After selecting a method to view results, a summary list of tests is displayed.
Select some or all tests to view the order detail, either on the screen or on a
printed hard copy.

For more information, please see the User Manual for the MEDITECH Laboratory
Module. The pertinent Laboratory information can be found in the Result
Inquiry Routine, which is on the Lab System/Lab Result Inquiry menu. The
pertinent Blood Bank information can be found in the Blood Bank Transfusion
Inquiry Routine which is on the Blood Bank System/BBK Patient Specimen Inquiry
menu.
MEDITECH Pathology Inquiry (5.3)                                       Page 158



5.3:   MEDITECH Pathology Inquiry


The MEDITECH Pathology Inquiry Routine allows patient's anatomical pathology
results to be reviewed directly from the MEDITECH $T Anatomical Pathology
Module if this module is set up for the Order Entry database.

At the patient prompt, identify the patient by account number, unit number,
full name, or partial name. The last patient entered in the current terminal
session can be recalled by pressing the spacebar, then pressing <Enter>.

A detailed description of all specimens ordered for the identified patient
appears on the screen. For each specimen, the follwowing information is
displayed:

                    * a number for rank ordering

                    * a specimen number

                    * the status of the specimen in the Anatomical
                      Pathology Module

                    * the date and time the specimen was submitted

                    * the date and time the specimen was received

                    * the ordering physician


For more information, please see the User Manual for the Laboratory Module. The
Pathology Specimen Findings Inquiry by MRI Routine, which is on the Anatomical
Pathology System/Pathology Specimen Findings Inquiry menu, contains pertinent
information.
Managing Administrative and Admissions Data (6)                        Page 159



Chapter 6:   Managing Administrative and Admissions Data


After an inpatient is registered, staff may need to enter or edit
administrative data such as demographic information, change in location, and
condition. They may also want to enter or edit certain clinical information,
such as diagnoses, allergies, and isolation. These tasks are accomplished
through the Enter/Edit Administrative Data Routine.

Users who are not authorized to change administrative data but who need to
review important clinical facts about a patient or patients have access to
such information through the View Administrative Data Routine.

Sometimes a patient is temporarily assigned to a location different from the
Care Area -- to an Operating Room or Intensive Care Area, for example. That
fact can be recorded through the Enter/Edit Temporary Location Routine.

It is also possible to review all admission-related activity for a patient
during his or her entire visit. Some of the activities displayed on such a
review are:

         * admission or registration information

         * transfers

         * changes in accommodations, physician, or service

         * cancelled reservations

         * changes in account number, unit number, or status


Choosing a Routine

The routines described in this chapter allow you to enter, edit, and review
administrative data for patients, and to review admission-related activity.
The table on the next page provides guidelines about which routine to choose to
perform a specific function.
Summary:   Managing Administrative and Admissions Data (6.1)               Page 160



6.1:   Summary:   Managing Administrative and Admissions Data


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
      Managing Administrative and Admissions Data: Tasks and Routines
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    To Perform This Function                   Use

Enter or update clinical data for              Enter/Edit Administrative Data
patients, such as the patient's
height and weight, condition, and
whether he or she can have visitors


Review a patient's clinical information        View Administrative Data

Copy administrative and dietary                Copy Administrative & Dietary Data
information from one patient account
to another within the same unit number

Enter or change a temporary location           Enter/Edit Temporary Location


Review information related to a                Review Admission Activity
patient's admission, such as birthdate,
age, and sex; admitting, attending and
other doctors; service; unit number;
location, room and bed numbers; status;
and admission date and time

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Enter/Edit Administrative Data (6.2)                                   Page 161



6.2:   Enter/Edit Administrative Data


The Enter/Edit Administrative Data Routine allows nursing personnel to enter,
update and review clinical information for patients assigned to their units.
It also allows them to enter a temporary location for a patient who has been
moved, for example, to the Operating Room, the Radiology Department, etc.

Users can also enter in specific dietary information to put a meal on hold for
a patient while they are away from there primary location. They do this simply
by specifying the date, the meal, and the time this meal should be released.
Several other pieces of information normally entered and maintained in the
Admissions Module appear on this screen and can be edited through this routine:

               * the patient's condition

               * whether the patient can have visitors

               * the patient's height and weight

The remaining information requested by the routine is defined by your facility,
and can be specific to each location.


How this screen is created

Above the white line is a variety of information collected through this
routine and/or in Admissions.

The prompts that appear below the white line on the screen are determined by an
entry in the Location Dictionary of the MIS Module. At the ADMIN. NURSING
SCREENS INPUT prompt in the group of prompts titled ORDER ENTRY, the
user enters the mnemonic of a Customer-Defined Screen from the MIS Module. The
queries on that Customer-Defined Screen appear as prompts on this routine.

Administrative queries

Certain information gathered on the Administrative screen including Diagnoses,
Allergies, Isolation, IV, O2, and Transportation, may be entered as
parameterized queries for special processing.

Have your MEDITECH consultant enter the query mnemonics in the Order Entry
parameters, and the Nursing parameters if applicable.

Responses to parameterized queries entered in the Nursing Assessment routine
default into the queries in the Order Entry Administrative screen.
Enter/Edit Administrative Data (6.2)                                   Page 162



How the data you collect through this routine is used

Certain data collected through this routine can appear on printed requisitions,
as part of the "Clinical Data" section. The facility determines which, if any,
data will be so treated. It does so through an entry in the Location
Dictionary of the MIS Module. At the OUTPUT prompt in the group of prompts
titled ADMIN. NURSING SCREENS, the user enters the mnemonic of a
Customer-Defined Screen that determines which data appear on requisitions.


+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Enter/Edit Administrative Data                               |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                              .0 A/S              Admit              |
|Temporary Location                                      Loc              Status             |
|                                                        Rm                                  |
|Hold Tray: Date           Meal          e               Bd               Unit #             |
|Condition                        Visitors Allowed                                           |
|Cmt                                                             Ht               in
|
|Visit Reason                                                   Wt          8    oz         g|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Patient               Identify the patient for whom you want to enter or
                      edit administrative data. If you are a restricted
                      user, you can identify only patients at the location of
                      your terminal.

                      NOTE:    If you want to enter or edit data for several
                               patients at one location in succession, enter the
                               letter L, followed by a space, followed by the
                               the mnemonic for the location. For more
                               information, please see "Looping through a
                               Location" at the PATIENT prompt in the Review
                               Orders (by order date) Routine.

When you have identified the patient, this patient registration information
appears on the screen, above the white line:

          Age and Sex                    Admission Date
          Location                       Admission Status
          Room and Bed Numbers           Unit Number

You cannot edit any of these fields.

In addition to that is the following information that you can edit.

          Temporary Location
Enter/Edit Administrative Data (6.2)                                   Page 163



         Hold Tray Date, Meal and Release Time
         Condition
         Visitors Allowed
         Comment
         Height and Weight

A number of additional customer-defined queries also appear on the screen below
the white line. The prompts are set up in the Location Dictionary of the MIS
Module, through specification of a Customer-Defined Screen from the MIS Module.
If responses to these prompts already exist, the responses appear also. You
can enter and/or edit data in any of these additional fields. If you do not
know how to respond to a prompt, use on-line help.


Temporary Location    If the patient is moved to a temporary location,
                      enter the mnemonic from the Location Dictionary of the
                      MIS Module, which identifies the temporary location. A
                      Lookup is available.

                      A Temporary Location is displayed as part of the
                      patient's identification information, until it is
                      deleted through this routine.

                      NOTE:   If your hospital has the Stat Broadcasting Option
                              for the Laboratory Module, results of tests with
                              a STAT priority will be printed at the patient's
                              temporary location, as well as at his/her
                              permanent location.

Your responses to the next three prompts allow you to prevent a meal tray from
being delivered to a patient for a specified length of time. You may find it
necessary to hold a patient's meal tray if, for example, the patient is
scheduled for a test at a meal delivery time. You could schedule the meal to
be held, and then released at the time that the patient is expected back on the
nursing floor.

After you place a meal on hold, if your OE Parameters are set up appropriately,
an OA message announcing the held meal automatically transmits to all concerned
users. Also, an *H* flag precedes the patient's name on the following:

         *   Current Diets reports

         *   Diet Changes reports

         *   meal and nourishment labels

For example, the name SMITH,MARJORIE appears as:

                              *H* SMITH,MARJORIE
Enter/Edit Administrative Data (6.2)                                   Page 164



Hold Tray             Enter the date that a diet should be on hold for
Date                  using the standard date format. The Hold Tray
                      fields may be edited if the selected patient has a diet
                      defined.

                      To avoid holding a meal for the current patient, leave
                      this prompt blank. If you do not enter a response, the
                      cursor bypasses the next two prompts.


Meal                  Enter the meal which should be on hold. The choices
                      of B, L, D, for Breakfast, Lunch, and Dinner,
                      respectively, are available at this prompt.


Release               The time specified here automatically releases the
                      hold on this diet. Enter a format of HHMM.

                      This release time is not required, and if no time is
                      entered, only the initial meal will be held and patients
                      receive a diet tray for the next meal.

                      When the release date and time specified come about, the
                      hold information is cleared from the screen, and all
                      reports once again reflect that this is an active diet.


Condition             You can enter or edit the patient's condition. The
                      response must be from this list of patient conditions
                      that is provided by MEDITECH in the Admissions Module:

                                 G(ood)

                                 F(air)

                                 S(erious)

                                 C(ritical)

                      A Lookup is available.   You are not required to respond
                      to this prompt.

                      NOTE:   Any information entered at this prompt will
                              automatically be updated in the Admissions
                              Module. Users in the Admissions Module can also
                              edit the response to the prompt.


Visitors Allowed      Enter Y if the patient can have visitors, N
                      if he/she cannot. If there is an existing
Enter/Edit Administrative Data (6.2)                                       Page 165



                         response, you can delete it and enter another one if
                         appropriate.

                         NOTE:   Any information entered at this prompt will
                                 automatically be updated in the Admissions
                                 Module.


Comment                  Enter free text if desired, up to 60 characters.

The next prompt, VISIT REASON, operates differently, depending on how you
set up your OE Parameters and Access Dictionary. To ensure that this prompt
works appropriately for your health care organization's situation, you must do
the following:

          *    specify in the OE parameters whether any users may view or
               edit the visit reason which was entered in the Admissions Module.

          *    specify in the Access Dictionary which user groups may edit
               the visit reason.

The following table summarizes how to set up the important prompts.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                    Controlling the Visit Reason Prompt
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
To Allow Users To        Set the ACCESS TO          Set the EDIT 'REASON FOR
                         ADMISSIONS REASON          FOR VISIT'? (Access
                         FOR VISIT Parameter to     Dictionary) prompt to

View and edit the visit           E(dit)                    Y
reason.

View but not edit the             V(iew)                    N
visit reason.

Neither view nor edit              N(0)                     N
the visit reason.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Visit Reason             The cursor stops here only if both of the
                         following are true:

                         *   your system is set up to copy the visit reason
                             entered in Admissions to this field

                         *   your user group is authorized in the Access
                             Dictionary to edit this prompt
Enter/Edit Administrative Data (6.2)                                    Page 166




                      Enter or edit the patient's reason for visit if
                      necessary. If you edit existing information, the new
                      data appears at this prompt in Admissions and all other
                      applications displaying the VISIT REASON prompt.


Ht ft                 If the existing information is incorrect, delete it
                      and enter the appropriate information. You can enter
                      the information in feet and inches or metric units.
                      The system automatically calculates and enters the
                      equivalent in the other system of measurement.

                      Enter the patient's height in feet, using 1 digit. If
                      the height is less than one foot, press <Return> to move
                      onto the next prompt, where you can enter the height in
                      inches.

                      The height and weight information entered in these
                      fields are compared to the MIS Height Weight Table. The
                      system compares the patient's age against the minimum
                      and maximum height and weight ranges as defined in MIS.

                      If a height or weight is entered and is out of the
                      minimum or maximum range, the user receives a warning
                      message.


Ht in                 Enter the patient's height in inches, using two
                      digits and one decimal place.

                      The height and weight information entered in these
                      fields are compared to the MIS Height Weight Table. The
                      system compares the patient's age against the minimum
                      and maximum height and weight ranges as defined in MIS.

                      If a height or weight is entered and is out of the
                      minimum or maximum range, the user receives a warning
                      message.


Ht cm                 If you entered the patient's height in feet and/or
                      inches, the metric equivalent automatically appears
                      here. If you did not enter the height in feet and
                      inches, enter it here in centimeters. The equivalent
                      measure in feet and/or inches automatically appears at
                      the left.

                      The height and weight information entered in these
                      fields are compared to the MIS Height Weight Table.   The
Enter/Edit Administrative Data (6.2)                                    Page 167



                      system compares the patient's age against the minimum
                      and maximum height and weight ranges as defined in MIS.

                      If a height or weight is entered and is out of the
                      minimum or maximum range, the user receives a warning
                      message.


Wt Lb                 If the existing information is incorrect, delete it
                      and enter the correct information. You can enter the
                      data in pounds and ounces or metric units. The
                      system automatically calculates and displays the
                      equivalent in the other system of measurement.

                      Enter the weight in pounds, using a maximum of 4 digits.
                      If the patient's weight is under 1 pound, press <Enter>
                      to move on to the next prompt, where you can enter the
                      weight in ounces.

                      The height and weight information entered in these
                      fields are compared to the MIS Height Weight Table. The
                      system compares the patient's age against the minimum
                      and maximum height and weight ranges as defined in MIS.

                      If a height or weight is entered and is out of the
                      minimum or maximum range, the user receives a warning
                      message.


Wt Oz                 Enter the patient's weight in ounces, using two
                      digits and one decimal place.

                      The height and weight information entered in these
                      fields are compared to the MIS Height Weight Table. The
                      system compares the patient's age against the minimum
                      and maximum height and weight ranges as defined in MIS.

                      If a height or weight is entered and is out of the
                      minimum or maximum range, the user receives a warning
                      message.


Wt Kg                 If you entered the patient's weight in pounds and/or
                      ounces, the metric equivalent automatically appears
                      here. If you did not enter the weight in pounds and
                      ounces, enter it here in kilograms, using up to three
                      digits followed by two decimals. The weight in pounds
                      and/or ounces automatically appears at the left.

                      The height and weight information entered in these
Enter/Edit Administrative Data (6.2)                                  Page 168



                      fields are compared to the MIS Height Weight Table. The
                      system compares the patient's age against the minimum
                      and maximum height and weight ranges as defined in MIS.

                      If a height or weight is entered and is out of the
                      minimum or maximum range, the user receives a warning
                      message.


Editing Customer-Defined Queries

A number of additional customer-defined queries may also appear on the screen.
After you respond to the customer-defined query in this routine, the
information appears as the default response to the same queries in the Enter
Orders Routine. If you edit the response in the Enter Orders Routine, if it
appears, the response in this routine remains unchanged.


Flagging Key Administrative Data Fields for Order Entry

Your health care organization may discourage users from filing orders before
collecting certain key administrative information such as allergies and
diagnosis on the customer-defined portion of the order entry screen. You can
set up your system to warn users if they try to file orders before critical
information is entered on the Administrative Data Screen.

To activate the warning flag, at the ADMIN SCR. WARNING prompt in the OE
parameters, ask your MEDITECH Applications Consultant to identify all the
Administrative Data Screen queries that you consider critical information.
After this parameter is set, if a user tries to enter an order before
completing the key administrative data fields, a warning message indicates the
incomplete fields. The user can then continue to file the order, or exit the
routine and file the missing information.
View Administrative Data (6.3)                                           Page 169



6.3:   View Administrative Data


This routine allows patient clinical information entered through the
Enter/Edit Administrative Data Routine to be viewed. This information cannot
edited from this routine. This routine is only for viewing.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                  View Administrative Data                                  |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                                                    Admit            |
|Temporary Location                                         Loc             Status           |
|                                                           Rm                               |
|Hold Tray: Date           Meal          e                  Bd              Unit #           |
|Condition                        Visitors Allowed                                           |
|Cmt                                                             Ht               in
|
|Visit Reason                                                   Wt          8   oz          g|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Patient                Identify the patient to view administrative data
                       for. Restricted users can only identify patients at
                       the location of the terminal being worked from.

                         NOTE:    To view data for several patients at one
                                  location in succession, enter the letter L,
                                  followed by a space, followed by the mnemonic
                                  for the location.

                         After the patient has been identified, the following
                         patient information defaults onto the screen:

                         *   Age and Sex (A/S)
                         *   Location
                         *   Registration Date
                         *   Status
                         *   Unit Number
                         *   Current Room and Bed
                         *   Temporary Location, if any
                         *   Hold Tray
                         *   Condition
                         *   Visitors Allowed
                         *   Comment
                         *   Reason for Visit
                         *   Height and Weight

                         This information can not be edited from this routine.
View Administrative Data (6.3)                                        Page 170




                        Additional Health Care Organization-defined prompts can
                        display on this screen. The Health Care
                        Organization-defined prompts are attached in the
                        Location Dictionary of the MIS Module with a Customer
                        Defined Screen.

                        If the queries have been responded to, the responses
                        will display. The queries are answered in the
                        Enter/Edit Administrative Data Routine. Responses can
                        not be entered or edited from this view-only routine.
Copy Administrative & Diet Data (6.4)                                     Page 171



6.4:   Copy Administrative & Diet Data


Use this routine to copy administrative and dietary query responses from one
patient account into another within the same unit number. This routine can be
used to avoid retyping vital information if a patient is discharged, then
readmitted under a different account number.

A patient's information can be copied provided the account remains active in
the Admissions module. After the record is purged, the information is no
longer available for copying.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                              Copy Administrative & Diet Data                               |
|============================================================================================|
|Copy Data                                                 A/S              Admit            |
|From Patient                                              Loc              Status           |
|                                                          Rm                                |
|                                                          Bd               Unit #           |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|Copy Data                                                 A/S              Admit            |
|Into Patient                                              Loc              Status           |
|                                                          Rm                                |
|                                                          Bd               Unit #           |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|                                                                                            |
|Copy Administrative Data?                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|Copy Dietary Data?                                                                          |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Copy Data From         Identify the patient to copy Administrative and
Patient:               Dietary data from. Restricted users can only
                       identify patients at the location of terminal being
                       worked from.

                       Identify patients by these methods:

                               * By account number

                               * By unit number
                                 Enter U#, followed by the unit number.

                               * By full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,
                                 MIDDLEINITIAL format, using up to 43
                                 characters

                               * By partial name
Copy Administrative & Diet Data (6.4)                                  Page 172




                               * By recalling the last patient entered in the
                                 current terminal session
                                 Press the spacebar and press <Enter>

                               * By Social Security number
                                 #222222222<Enter> or #222-22-2222<Enter>

                      After the patient has been identified, the following
                      patient registration information defaults onto the
                      screen:

                      *   Age and Sex (A/S)
                      *   Location
                      *   Registration Date
                      *   Status
                      *   Unit Number
                      *   Current Room and Bed

                      This information can not be edited from this routine.


Copy Data Into        Identify the patient to copy Administrative and/or
Patient:              Dietary data into from the other Account. The
                      patient identified at this prompt must have the same
                      unit number as the patient identified in the "Copy Data
                      From" prompt.


Copy Administrative    Answer Y to copy the Administrative Data from
Data?                  one patient into the other patient.

                      Answer N to not copy the Administrative Data from one
                      patient into the other patient.


Copy Dietary           Answer Y to copy the Dietary Data from one patient
Data?                  into the other patient.

                      Answer N to not copy the Dietary Data from one
                      patient into the other patient.
Administrative Data Audit Trail (6.5)                                         Page 173



6.5:       Administrative Data Audit Trail


The Administrative Data Audit Trail records activity associated with the
Administrative Data screen. The report will list all activity, including the
date, time, and user who initially entered the Administrative Data for a
patient. The system will also log the date, time, user and event that takes
place when any edits are made to any of the Adminsitrative Data fields or
Customer-Defined Queries.

These fields include:

       *   temporary location
       *   hold tray date
       *   hold tray meal
       *   tray release time
       *   condition
       *   visitors allowed
       *   comment
       *   visit reason
       *   height and weight

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                        Administrative Data Audit Trail                        |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Patient                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Patient                    Identify the patient for whom you want to enter or
                           edit administrative data. If you are a restricted
                           user, you can identify only patients at the location of
                           your terminal.

                           Use the following methods to identify a patient:

                                   1 - by account number

                                   2 - by unit number
                                       Enter U#, followed by the unit number.

                                   3 - by full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,
                                       MIDDLEINITIAL format, using up to 43
                                       characters

                                   4 - by partial name

                                   5 - by recalling the last patient entered in the
Administrative Data Audit Trail (6.5)                                 Page 174



                                  current terminal session
                                  Press the spacebar, then press <Enter>.


                              6 - by social security number (#NNNNNNNNN or
                                  #NNN-NN-NNNN)
Enter/Edit Temporary Location (6.6)                                     Page 175



6.6:   Enter/Edit Temporary Location


This routine allows a temporary location to be entered for a patient. For
example, a temporary location could be entered for a patient who is moved from
his/her permanent location to the Operating Room or the Radiology Department.

While the patient is signed out to a temporary location, all messages for
him/her will be sent to that location. If your health care organization has
the Stat Broadcasting Option for the Laboratory Module, results of tests with a
Stat priority will be printed at the patient's temporary location, as well as
at his/her permanent location.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Enter/Edit Temporary Location                                |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                                  A/S              Admit             |
|                                                         Loc              Status            |
|                                                         Rm                                 |
|Temporary Location                                       Bd               Unit #            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Patient                Identify the patient to enter or edit a temporary
                       location. Restricted users can identify only patients at
                       the location of terminal being worked from.

                       NOTE:    To view the temporary location for several
                                patients at one location in succession, enter the
                                letter L, followed by a space, followed by the
                                mnemonic for the location. For more information,
                                please see "Looping through a Location" at the
                                PATIENT prompt in the Review Orders (by order
                                date) Routine.

                       After the patient has been identified, the following
                       patient registration information defaults onto the
                       screen:

                       *   Age and Sex (A/S)
                       *   Location
                       *   Registration Date
                       *   Status
                       *   Unit Number
                       *   Current Room and Bed

                       This information can not be edited from this routine.
Enter/Edit Temporary Location (6.6)                                   Page 176



Temporary Location    Enter the mnemonic of the temporary location. A
                      Lookup is available to the MIS Location Dictionary.

                      For example: RAD for Radiology

                      A temporary location is displayed as part of the
                      patient's identification information until it is
                      deleted through this routine.

                      NOTE:   If the Health Care Organization has the Stat
                              Broadcasting Option for the Laboratory Module,
                              results of tests with a STAT priority will be
                              printed at the patient's temporary location, as
                              well as at his/her permanent location.
Review Admissions Activity (6.7)                                             Page 177



6.7:       Review Admissions Activity


This routine provides a list of all admissions activity for a specific patient
during a specific visit. The list records such activities as:

       *   Inpatient schedule, pre-admission, admission, and discharge
       *   Outpatient schedule, pre-registration, registration, departure/discharge
       *   Patient transfers, changes in room or bed, bed swaps
       *   Edits to accommodation, attending physician or service
       *   Patient events that have been "undone", cancelled reservations
       *   Edits to account number, unit number, and VIP/Confidential status


For each activity, the following information is displayed on the screen:

       *   the name of the activity
       *   the date and time the activity was entered
       *   the initials of the user who entered the activity
       *   the effective date and time of the activity
       *   if applicable, the old and new values for the activity
       *   for certain activities, comments entered during edits


This review of admission activity provides an audit trail to ensure that the
patient's records are properly maintained.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                   REVIEW PATIENT ACTIVITY                                  |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                                                                     |
|                                                                                            |
|Name                                     Birthdate          Age          Sex                |
|                                                                                            |
|Primary Care Physician                                                                      |
|Admit Physician                                                                             |
|Attend Physician                                                                            |
|ER Physician                                                                                |
|                                                                                            |
|Service                                                                                     |
|                                                                                            |
|Unit #                      Location                  Room                                  |
|         2.5                Status                    Bed                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|Admit/Service Date                                                                          |
|Admit/Service Time                                                                          |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+

Patient                    If you are a restricted user, you can identify
                           only patients at the location of your terminal.
Review Admissions Activity (6.7)                                      Page 178



                      When you have identified the patient, this patient
                      registration information appears on the screen:

                            Name, Birthdate, Age and Sex
                            Admitting, Attending and Emergency-Room Physicians
                            Service
                            Unit Number, Location and Room
                            Status and Bed
                            Admit/Service Date
                            Admit/Service Time


                      In addition, the following message appears:

                      Print on:

                      Enter the mnemonic of the device on which you want to
                      print the report.
View Departmental Data (6.8)                                              Page 179



6.8:   View Departmental Data


This routine allows Department specific patient data which was entered through
the Enter/Edit Department Data Routine to be viewed.   The top portion of the
screen displays the patient's registration information and, if entered, his or
her temporary location. The bottom portion displays prompts defined for a
customer-defined screen and, if entered, the responses. This screen is only
for viewing.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                   View Departmental Data                                   |
|============================================================================================|
|Department                                                A/S             Admit             |
|                                                          Loc             Status            |
|Patient                                                   Rm                                |
|                                                          Bd              Unit #            |
|Temporary Location                                                                          |
|                                                              Ht              in            |
|                                                              Wt          8   oz          g |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Department             If the terminal is managed, a department's mnemonic
                       is displayed.

                       If the terminal is not managed, enter the mnemonic from
                       the MIS Location Dictionary identifying the department
                       to enter or edit information. A Lookup is available.

                       NOTE:    Users only have access to departments assigned in
                                the MIS User Dictionary.


Patient                Identify the patient to view department data for.
                       Restricted users can only identify patients at the
                       location of the terminal being worked from.

                         Identify patients by these methods:

                                 * By account number

                                 * By unit number
                                   Enter U#, followed by the unit number.

                                 * By full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,
                                   MIDDLEINITIAL format, using up to 43
View Departmental Data (6.8)                                            Page 180



                                   characters

                                 * By partial name

                                 * By recalling the last patient entered in the
                                   current terminal session
                                   Press the spacebar and press <Enter>

                                 * By Social Security number
                                   #222222222<Enter> or #222-22-2222<Enter>


                      NOTE:    To view data for several patients at one location
                               in succession, enter the letter L followed by a
                               space, followed by the the mnemonic for the
                               location. For more information, please see
                               "Looping through a Location" at the Patient
                               prompt in the Review Orders (by order date)
                               Routine.


                         After the patient has been identified, the following
                         patient information defaults onto the screen:

                         *   Age and Sex (A/S)
                         *   Location
                         *   Registration Date
                         *   Status
                         *   Unit Number
                         *   Current Room and Bed
                         *   Temporary Location
                         *   Height and Weight

                         This information can not be edited from this routine.

                         Additional Health Care Organization-defined prompts
                         also appear on the screen. The Health Care
                         Organization-defined prompts are attached in the
                         Location Dictionary of the MIS Module with a Customer
                         Defined Screen.

                         These queries are department specific queries that are
                         answered in the Enter/Edit Department Data Routine.
                         If the queries have been answered in the Enter/Edit
                         Department Data Routine, the responses will display.
                         Responses can not be entered or edited from this
                         routine.
Monitoring the Patient Population (7)                                   Page 181



Chapter 7:   Monitoring the Patient Population


There are a number of routines that give health care staff instant access to
information about the patient population, and the availabilty of beds for new
patients. The routines show:

     * what patients are at various locations, in what rooms and beds

     * lists -- sorted by location -- of occupied and unoccupied beds

     * records of admission and transfer activity for a location or a range of
       locations

     * information about the status of a particular bed: occupied, reserved,
       ready for occupancy, or in need of housekeeping services


Routine Summary: Monitoring the Patient Population

The table below provides guidelines about which routine to choose to perform a
specific function.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
           Monitoring the Patient Population: Tasks and Routines
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

To Perform This Function                         Use

List inpatients, sorted by room/bed              Print Census
order, for a specific location


List beds, in room/bed order for a               Print Bed Roster
specific location or a range of
locations, including the occupant's
name and condition


List the admission, discharge, and               Print Location Activity
transfer activity of all patients
at one location or a range of locations


Review and/or change the status of a bed         Enter/Edit Housekeeping Data

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Print Census (7.1)                                                        Page 182



7.1:    Print Census


This routine provides a list of inpatients, sorted in room/bed order, for a
specified location. The report displays the following information for each
patient at the location requested:

            *   room/bed numbers                *   admission date
            *   patient name                    *   age
            *   account number                  *   sex
            *   unit number                     *   attending physician

NOTE:   Only authorized users can view data for any patient whose status is
        confidential. Other users who request such data see instead a
        hospital-defined phrase that indicates the confidential status of the
        patient.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           PRINT NURSING UNIT CENSUS                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Location                                                                   |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


For Location             The default response is the location of the user's
                         terminal. You can delete this location and enter
                         another location in the hospital, if appropriate.
                         Locations are defined in the Location Dictionary; a
                         LOOKUP is available.
Print Bed Roster (7.2)                                                    Page 183



7.2:   Print Bed Roster


This routine provides a list of beds, sorted in room/bed order, for a
user-selected range of care areas in your facility. You can print the Bed
Roster for a single location, a selected group of locations or all locations.
The report is useful for admissions personnel who assign patients to beds.

The report lists both occupied and unoccupied beds:

       For each occupied bed, the list displays:

                * the room and bed number
                * the occupant's name
                * the patient's condition and any comments about the patient
                  (if these have been entered in the Enter/Edit Administrative
                  Data Routine)

       NOTE:    Only authorized users can view bed-roster data for patients
                whose status is confidential. Other users who request such data
                see instead a hospital-defined phrase that indicates a
                confidential status.


       For each unoccupied bed, the report shows a series of hyphens (-----).
       In addition, for each location, the Bed Roster includes a tally of:

                     * the number of patients assigned to the location
                     * the number of empty beds
                     * the total number of beds in the location


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                  BED ROSTER                                   |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Location                                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Location                                                                  |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+

From Location             Press <RETURN> to if you want the Bed Roster to
Beginning                 begin with the first listing in the Location
                          Dictionary of the MIS Location Dictionary. If you want
                          the report to begin at a different location, delete
                          BEGINNING and enter the mnemonic of the location at
                          which you want the report to begin. A LOOKUP is
                          available.


To Location               Press <RETURN> if you want the Bed Roster to end
Print Bed Roster (7.2)                                                    Page 184



End                      with the last listing in the Location Dictionary of
                         the MIS Module. If you want the report to end at a
                         different location, delete END and enter the mnemonic
                         for another location. A LOOKUP is available.


After you enter the appropriate responses, the following message appears:

                                   Print on:

Enter the mnemonic of the device on which you want to print the report.
Rounds Report (without PCI) (7.3)                                         Page 185



7.3:   Rounds Report (without PCI)


The Rounds Report (without PCI) lists all patients associated to a specified
provider and provider group, if defined. The report includes the Attending
Physician, Family Physician or Consulting Physician for the patients listed.

The date the Rounds Report was run is displayed at the top of the page next to
the name of the provider whose patients are listed.

The list is sorted by location. Within location, patients are sorted in
room/bed order. In addition to location, room, and bed, the list includes the
following data for each patient:

          * name (names of patients seen in consultation are preceded
            with an asterisk)

          * age and sex

          * length of stay

          * attending physician (this may or may not be the same as the
            provider for whom the report is being run)

The total number of patients listed is displayed at the bottom of the report.

If the provider belongs to a group, the list can include the patients of:

          *   any other provider in the Provider Group of the selected
              provider

          *   all providers in the Provider Group of the selected provider

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                 Rounds Report                                 |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|List Patients For Provider                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Include Patients For Provider                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Include All Patients For                                                       |
|All Providers IN Provider Group                                ?               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Rounds Report (without PCI) (7.3)                                      Page 186



List Patients          Enter the mnemonic of the provider to list patients
For Provider           for. A Lookup of the Provider Dictionary is
                       available.

                       Enter the provider's mnemonic and the full name defaults
                       in to the right of the mnemonic. In addition, if the
                       provider belongs to a group, the name of that provider's
                       group appears at the bottom of the screen.


Include Patients       Enter the name of any other provider(s) in the same
For Provider           Provider Group as the specified provider. A Lookup
                       of the Provider Dictionary is available. If a provider
                       who is not in the same Provider Group as the selected
                       provider is chosen, this message appears:

                           This provider must be in the same Provider Group

                       If the provider does not belong to any Provider Group,
                       other provider's patients can not be included on this
                       list.


Include All Patients   If the selected provider belongs to a Provider Group
For All Providers In   the name of that group is displayed.
Provider Group?
                       The default response is N. Press <Enter> to not
                       include patients of all the providers in the
                       Provider Group of the selected provider on this report.
                       Delete the N and enter Y to include patients
                       of all the providers in the Provider Group.

                       Enter the mnemonic of the printer to print the Rounds
                       Report to at the Print On Prompt. A Lookup is available.

                       This report can be mailed by entering MAIL at the
                       Print on prompt and entering the appropriate mailing
                       information.

                       This report can be faxed by entering FAX at the Print on
                       prompt, depending on how the users access has been
                       defined, and entering the appropriate faxing
                       information.
Rounds Report By Doctor (without PCI) (7.4)                              Page 187



7.4:   Rounds Report By Doctor (without PCI)


The Rounds Report by Provider (without PCI) lists all patients associated to
a specified provider and/or provider group.

The date the Rounds Report was run is displayed at the top of the page next to
the name of the provider(s) whose patients are listed.

The list is sorted by location. Within location, patients are sorted in
room/bed order. In addition to location, room, and bed, the list includes the
following data for each patient:

          * name (names of patients seen in consultation are preceded
            with an asterisk)

          * age and sex

          * length of stay

          * attending physician (this may or may not be the same as the
            provider for whom the report is being run)

The total number of patients is displayed at the bottom of the report.

The Rounds Report can be run for a selected provider(s), selected provider
group(s), or both.

You may bypass the top portion of the screen, and print reports for all
providers serving in any of the following capacities:

          *   attending physician
          *   admitting physician
          *   family physician
          *   consulting provider

For example, you can generate a rounds report for all providers acting as the
Attending Physician by entering Y at the ALL ATTENDING PROVIDERS?
prompt.

The printed reports generated by this routine are identical to those generated
by the Rounds Report (Without PCI) Routine. This routine is more flexible
because you can print rounds reports for several providers, even if they belong
to different provider groups in your health care organization.
Rounds Report By Doctor (without PCI) (7.4)                            Page 188

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                 Rounds Report By Provider                                  |
|============================================================================================|
|All Patients For Providers                                                                  |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|All Patients For Provider Groups                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------                   |
|All Attending Providers?                        All Family Providers?                       |
|All Admitting Providers?                        All Consulting Providers?                   |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


All Patients          Enter the provider mnemonic(s) for whom to list all
For Providers         patients for and the full name defaults in to the
                      right of the mnemonic. A Lookup of the Provider
                      Dictionary is available.


All Patients          Enter the mnemonic(s) of the provider group(s) for
For Provider          whom to list all patients for and the group name
Groups                defaults to the right of the mnemonic. A Lookup
                      of the Provider Group Dictionary is available.


All                    Enter Y to list all attending providers and their
Attending              patients.
Providers
                      The date the Rounds Report was run is displayed at the
                      top of the page next to the attending physician's name.
Print/List Location Activity (7.5)                                     Page 189



7.5:   Print/List Location Activity


This routine prints a record of the admission, discharge and transfer activity
of a location or a range of locations. The report can be run for today, today
plus the day before, or today plus two days before.

This routine is useful to personnel who need to know the changes in an
inpatient population at a specific location on a specific date or dates.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                          Inpatient Location Activity                          |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Date                                                                      |
|                                                                               |
|From Time                                                                      |
|                                                                               |
|From Location                                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Location                                                                  |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


From Date             Enter the date to begin the record of location using
                      the standard date format. The date cannot be earlier
                      than two days in the past.


From Time             Enter the time to begin the location activity report
                      using the standard time format.


From Location         Press <Enter> to have the list of location activity
Beginning             begin at the first entry in the Location Dictionary.
                      To begin at a different location, delete BEGINNING and
                      enter the mnemonic of the location to begin the list
                      with. A Lookup of locations from the MIS Location
                      Dictionary is available.


Thru Location         Press <Enter> to end with the last entry in the
End                   Location Dictionary. To end the list with a
                      different location, delete END and enter the mnemonic of
                      the location to end the list with. A Lookup of locations
                      from the MIS Location Dictionary is available.
Enter/Edit Housekeeping Information (7.6)                               Page 190



7.6:    Enter/Edit Housekeeping Information


The Enter/Edit Housekeeping Information Routine enables you to review and/or
change the status of any bed in your facility. The routine also tells you:

           * whether a bed is occupied
           * its current status (for example: reserved, out of order, dirty)
           * any comments about the bed (for example: time of reservation)


Examples of how the routine is used

1) In many facilities, the Admissions Module is set up to change the status of
   a bed to "Dirty" automatically on patient discharge or transfer. This
   routine allows housekeeping personnel to record which beds have been cleaned
   and are ready for patient assignment.

2) In anticipation of the arrival of a post-operative patient, a unit clerk in
   the Intensive Care Unit can use this routine to change the status of a bed
   from "Clean" to "Reserved Pending Transfer". On the other hand, a clerk
   wishing to retain the "Clean" status can record the reservation by entering
   in the COMMENT line the message: "Reserved Pending Transfer".

NOTE:   A bed can have only one status at a time; it must be one of those
        defined in the Bed Status Dictionary of the Admissions Module.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                      ENTER/EDIT HOUSEKEEPING INFORMATION                      |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Room                                                                           |
|                                                                               |
|Bed                                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|Occupied?                                                                      |
|                                                                               |
|Status                                                                         |
|                                                                               |
|Comment                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Room                    Enter the mnemonic, from the Room Dictionary of the
                        MIS Module, of the room in which the bed of interest is
                        located. A LOOKUP is available.


Bed                     Enter the mnemonic of the bed of interest. A LOOKUP
                        of beds in the specified room is available.
Enter/Edit Housekeeping Information (7.6)                              Page 191



                      If information about the occupancy or status of the bed
                      has already been entered, it appears on the screen. You
                      can edit the information as necessary.


Occupied              Enter Y if the bed is occupied, N if it is
                      not.


Status                Enter the mnemonic, from the Bed Status Dictionary
                      of the Admissions Module, that describes the status of
                      this bed. A LOOKUP is available.


Comment               If you like, enter any comment about the bed, using
                      up to 40 characters of free text.


After you enter or edit the status of the bed, the following message appears:

                      File?

                      Enter Y to file the information you just entered and
                      return to the BED prompt.

                      Enter N to return to the COMMENT prompt.
Entering and Reviewing Requisitions (non-patient routines) (8)            Page 192



Chapter 8:   Entering and Reviewing Requisitions (non-patient routines)


In addition to entering orders for patient care through the Order Entry Module,
users can also enter requisitions for supplies, maintenance work, and other
facility requirements that are not directly associated with patient care. They
can also:

     * print stock requisitions for a specific location

     * print lists of all requisitions entered on a specific date

     * reprint the paperwork associated with a particular requisition


Routine Summary:   Entering and Reviewing Requisitions

The following table summarizes the main tasks you can perform related to
entering and reviewing requisitions, and suggests the appropriate routine to
use to accomplish each task.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
         Entering and Reviewing Requisitions: Tasks and Reference
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

 To Perform This Function                     Use

 Enter requisitions for stock supplies        Enter Requisitions
 and maintenance for a specific location

 Print a list of stock requisitions           List Stock Requisitions
 for a specific location

 Print a list, by department or category,     Print Requisition Log
 of all requisitions entered on a
 specific date

 Reprint paperwork associated with a         Reprint Requisition's Paperwork
 particular requisition
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Enter Requisitions (8.1)                                               Page 193



8.1:   Enter Requisitions



The Enter Requisitions Routine allows users to enter requisitions for supplies,
maintenance work, and other health care organization requirements that are not
directly associated with patient care. Users can only access categories that
are defined as Work and Stock types in the Category Dictionary. The routine is
available to users in Care Areas and users in Departments. The screens for the
two areas are identical except for their titles. The screen for Departments is
shown here.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Enter Department Requisitions                                |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|User                                                                                        |
|                                                                                            |
|Location                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|       Category     Procedure    Procedure Name                  Qty Print Here             |
|                                                                          7                 |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                          7                 |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
| _                                                                                        _ |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


User                  The name assigned to you in the User Dictionary
                      of the MIS Module appears at the USER prompt, both in
                      its mnemonic code and as the full name. You cannot edit
                      this field. The user mnemonic is captured for each
                      transaction you perform, and it appears on various
                      requisitions and reports.


Location              Enter a mnemonic from the Location Dictionary of the
                      MIS Module, which identifies the health care organization
                      location for which the user would like to enter
                      requisitions. A Lookup is available.
Enter Requisitions (8.1)                                               Page 194




                     Upon entering the mnemonic of the location, the full name
                     appears beside it.


Category             Enter the mnemonic of the Work or Stock type category
                     associated with the procedure being ordered. A Lookup is
                     available.

                     You can identify only categories in departments to which
                     you are given access in the MIS User Dictionary. If you
                     try to identify a category in a department to which you
                     have not been given access at the Access to OE
                     routines for departments: prompt, you will receive an
                     error message.

                     Upon identifying a category, an indicator arrow appears
                     at the left of that category. Any health care
                     organization defined prompts specified for that category
                     appear in the lower section of the screen and the cursor
                     moves to the PROCEDURE prompt.

                     Each time a user enters an order, the indicator arrow
                     moves to the left of that order. Users can scroll up and
                     down through orders by moving the UP and DOWN arrows; the
                     indicator arrow moves as they do so. Users can edit or
                     delete any part of the order with the arrow next to it.


Procedure            Enter the mnemonic of the procedure associated with
                     the specified category. A Lookup of procedures in the
                     selected category is available.

                     NOTE:   In addition to the standard LOOKUP, users can
                             use one of the following methods:

                                            Full          Partial
                     LOOKUP Method          LOOKUP        LOOKUP

                     alphabetically by       <Lookup>      [chars]<Lookup>
                     procedure name                        (e.g., EL<Lookup>)

                     numerically by         #<Lookup>     #[num]<Lookup>
                     procedure number                     (e.g., #500<Lookup>)


                     Users can only enter procedures that are specified as
                     D(epartment) or B(oth) at the ORDER BY prompt in the
                     Procedure Dictionary. If a user enters a procedure that
                     is defined as Care Area, this message appears:
Enter Requisitions (8.1)                                               Page 195




                                   This entry is unavailable.

                     Upon entering a mnemonic, the full name of the procedure
                     appears beside it. The default quantity (if any) and
                     print-here (if any) responses set up in the Procedure
                     Dictionary appear at the appropriate prompts at the
                     right. It is possible to delete the default responses
                     and enter new ones, if appropriate.


Qty                  The cursor stops here only if a QUANTITY prompt
                     is set up for this procedure in the Procedure Dictionary.
                     Users can enter the quantity of the procedure to be
                     ordered or, if a default quantity set up in the Procedure
                     Dictionary appears, it may be edited.


Here                 The cursor stops here only if a HERE prompt is
                     set up for this procedure in the Procedure Dictionary. If
                     a default response of Y or N is set up in the
                     Procedure Dictionary, that appears here also. The users
                     response determines whether or not requisitions for the
                     procedure are printed at the usual locations.

                     Enter N in order for them to be printed at the usual
                     locations as defined in the Procedure Dictionary.

                     Enter Y in order for all requisitions to be
                     printed at the ordering location. For example, if
                     requisitions for this procedure are usually printed at
                     four different locations, all four of them will be
                     printed at the ordering location, or "Here". This
                     feature is sometimes useful if the requisitions
                     ordinarily go to departments that are not open 24 hours,
                     or to float staff, and need to be hand-delivered.


Customer-Defined Queries

The cursor moves to the health care organization defined prompts in the lower
section of the screen, some of which may require responses. If the user does
not know how to respond, use on-line assistance. If they fail to respond to a
required field, a message appears to remind them that a response is required.

                           N fields are required

Press <Enter> to set the cursor at the first unanswered required field.
List Stock Requisitions (8.2)                                              Page 196



8.2:   List Stock Requisitions


Use the List Stock Requisitions Routine to print a list of all stock
requisitions for a specific location. The list can be printed on the screen
or to a printer.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                            List Stock Requisitions                            |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Location                                                                       |
|                                                                               |
|Final Copy                                                                     |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Location              If a location appears at this prompt, you can gain
                      access only to information from that location. If no
                      location appears, enter a mnemonic from the Location
                      Dictionary of the MIS Module, which identifies the
                      location for which you want to list stock requisitions.

                      NOTE: Sometimes no location appears at this prompt and
                            you are a restricted user and your terminal is
                            only associated to a few locations. In that case,
                            when choosing a location you may receive the
                            following message:

                             This device is not associated with that location


Final Copy            Enter Y if you want to print the stock
                      requisition list for the last time, and delete it from
                      the system. Enter N if you want to print the stock
                      requisition list, and retain the list as is in the
                      computer records. After the list is printed or displayed
                      on the screen, this message appears:

                                 Clear stock requisition list?

                      Enter Y to delete the list and N to retain the list.

                      When submerging the print job, by either spooling or
                      printing to VIEW, this message appears to indicate that
                      the list will be cleared:

                             Submerged report.    List will be cleared.   OK?
List Stock Requisitions (8.2)                                          Page 197



                     Enter Y to start the background job and clear the list.

                     Enter N to not continue.   The cursor will return to the
                     "Final Copy" prompt.
Print Requisition Log (8.3)                                                        Page 198



8.3:       Print Requisition Log


This routine allows you to print a list of all requisitions for procedures in
Stock or Work categories that were entered through the Enter Requisitions
Routine by a specific department or in a specific category, on a specific date.

The list provides management with a useful tool for analyzing ordering trends
by department or by category.

The Requisition Log shows:

       *   the   department                        *   the   procedure
       *   the   category                          *   the   quantity
       *   the   service date of the requisition   *   the   requesting location
       *   the   order number                      *   the   requesting user


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                             List Requisition Log                              |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|Service Date                                                                   |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Department/Category          You can identify a department or a category.


                            Identifying a Department

                            Under some circumstances, the mnemonic for a department
                            appears at this prompt. If you want to print a
                            requisitions log for that department, press <Enter>.
                            If you want to print a requisition log for a different
                            department, delete the default response and follow the
                            directions below.

                            If no department name appears, enter a mnemonic, from
                            the Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that
                            identifies the department for which you want to print a
                            requisition log. A Lookup is available.

                            NOTE:   You can identify only departments to
                                    which you are explicitly given access in the MIS
                                    User Dictionary, at the "Access to OE routines
                                    for departments:" prompt. If you try to identify
Print Requisition Log (8.3)                                              Page 199



                              a department to which you have not been given
                              access, this message appears:

                                   [User name] does not have access to
                                   [department name]


                      Identifying a Category

                      If you want to identify a category instead   of a
                      department, delete the default response to   this prompt,
                      if any. Enter the letter C, followed by a    space,
                      followed by the mnemonic of the category.    A Lookup is
                      available.

                      NOTE:   You can identify only categories in
                              departments to which you are given access in the
                              MIS User Dictionary. If you try to identify a
                              category in a department to which you have not
                              been given access, this message appears:

                                   [User name] does not have access to
                                   [category's] department.


Service Date          Enter the date for which you want to print a
                      requisition log, using the standard format or a T
                      combination.
Reprint Requisition's Paperwork (8.4)                                  Page 200



8.4:   Reprint Requisition's Paperwork


This routine allows you to identify a requisition and to reprint the paperwork
associated with it. You can edit the format, the destination device, and the
number of copies of the requisition. Each requisition that is printed through
this routine is identified by the line ***REPRINT*** near the top of the page.

The routine is useful for reprinting lost or misplaced requisitions, or for
printing a clean requisition when a printer jams, or when there is a system
problem while you are entering requisitions.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                        Reprint Requisition's Paperwork                        |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Category                                                                       |
|                                                                               |
|Order                                                                          |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Department                                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|----------------Procedure---------------- ---Service---                        |
|Mnemonic   Name                            Date     Time Pri Qty Status        |
|                                                             4                 |
|                                                                               |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------     |
|                                                                               |
|              Format      Destination      Copies                              |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Category               Enter a mnemonic, from the Category Dictionary, that
                       identifies the category of the material on the
                       requisition you want to reprint. If your terminal is
                       associated with one or more departments, you can only
                       enter categories from those departments. If you try to
                       enter an inappropriate category, this message appears:

                             This device is not associated with that
                             category's department
Reprint Requisition's Paperwork (8.4)                                  Page 201



                      A Lookup is available for stock and work type
                      categories.


Order                 Enter the order number of the requisition you want
                      to reprint. A Lookup is available.

                      NOTE:   If you want to look up requisitions by date,
                              you can enter the first 4 digits of a date:

                              For example:   0201

                              The Lookup start with those numbers, which
                              are equivalent to the date February 1.


When you enter the order number, the upper half of the screen displays the
department that placed the requisition and pertinent information about the
requisition: the procedure, the service date and time, the priority, quantity
and status. You cannot edit this information.

The lower half of the screen displays printing information: the format, the
destination device and the number of copies of the requisition. You can edit
this information.


Format                The mnemonic of the printing format requested for
                      this procedure in the Procedure Dictionary appears at
                      this prompt. Press <Enter> if you want to reprint the
                      requisition in that format. If you want to reprint it
                      in another format, delete the existing mnemonic and
                      enter the mnemonic of the appropriate format.


Destination           The mnemonic of the printer to which this format of
                      the order form should be sent, as set up in the
                      Procedure Dictionary, appears at this prompt. Press
                      <Enter> if you want to reprint the requisition at the
                      same printer. If you want to reprint the requisition at
                      a different printer, delete the existing mnemonic and
                      enter the mnemonic of the appropriate printer. A Lookup
                      is available.


Copies                The number of copies of this format of the order
                      form, as set up in the Procedure Dictionary, appears
                      at this prompt. Press <Enter> if this is the number
                      you want to print. If you want to print a different
                      number, delete this number and enter the appropriate
                      number.
Reporting Procedures (9)                                                  Page 202



Chapter 9:   Reporting Procedures


The Order Entry Module offers a number of reports that allow staff to view
lists of orders that fall into certain groups. Examples are:

     * orders for duplicate procedures

     * orders that have not been completed

     * orders that have been in process for longer than the turnaround time
       specified in the Procedure Dictionary

     * orders designated as charge editable in the Procedure Dictionary,
       which have never been charged

     * orders that were deleted or cancelled, or for which cancellation
       requests were entered

     * all orders entered on a selected date by a specific department, or in a
       specific category


Routine Summary:   Reporting Procedures

The routines for reporting procedures are described in this chapter. The
following table summarizes the main tasks related to reporting and suggests the
appropriate routine to use to accomplish each task.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                 Reporting Procedures: Tasks and Routines
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

 To List This Data                           Use

 Duplicate orders by department              List Duplicate Procedures
 or category. The list shows the
 clinical justification for entry
 of a duplicate order.

 Incomplete orders for a patient             List Incomplete Orders
 or a location (orders with a                (by patient)
 status of Transmitted,
 Ordered, or In Process)

 Orders, by department or category,          List Overdue Procedures
 that have been In Process for
 longer than the defined turnaround
 time for the procedure

 Completed orders, by department             List Uncharged Procedures
 or category, that are charge
Reporting Procedures (9)                                                Page 203



 editableand have not yet
 been charged to a patient

 Orders, by department or                   List Cancelled Procedures
 category, that:
 - are deleted or cancelled
 - have outstanding cancellation requests
 - have denied cancellation requests

 All orders for a specific service          Daily Log
 date, by department or category

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Duplicate Procedures Report (9.1)                                               Page 204



9.1:       Duplicate Procedures Report


This routine allows you to print a report of all the duplicate procedures
ordered for a specific department or a specific category, during a specific
range of service dates.

A procedure is considered to be a duplicate if it is ordered more than once,
for the same patient, within less time than the time specified for that
procedure in the Procedure Dictionary at the DUPLICATE ORDER HOURS prompt.
A user who orders a duplicate procedure is alerted at the time of order entry
and asked to supply a clinical justification for duplicating the procedure.

The Duplicate Procedures report shows these elements of each duplicate
procedure:

       *   the   category                *   the   priority, quantity and status
       *   the   order number            *   the   patient's name and account number
       *   the   service date and time   *   the   ordering doctor
       *   the   procedure               *   the   clinical justification for ordering

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           List Duplicate Procedures                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|From Service Date                                                              |
|Thru Service Date                                                              |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Department/Category          You can identify a department or a category.


                            Identifying a Department

                            Under some circumstances, the mnemonic for a department
                            appears at this prompt. If you want to list duplicate
                            procedures for that department, press <Enter>. If you
                            want to list duplicate procedures for a different
                            department, delete the default response and follow the
                            directions below.

                            If no department name appears, enter a mnemonic, from
                            the Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that
                            identifies the department for which you want to list
                            duplicate procedures. A Lookup is available.
Duplicate Procedures Report (9.1)                                         Page 205



                      Note:   You can identify only departments to
                              which you are explicitly given access in the MIS
                              User Dictionary, at the "Access to OE routines
                              for departments:" prompt. If you try to identify
                              a department to which you have not been given
                              access, this message appears:

                                    [User name] does not have access to
                                    [department name]


                      Identifying a Category

                      If you want to identify a category instead   of a
                      department, delete the default response to   this prompt,
                      if any. Enter the letter C, followed by a    space,
                      followed by the mnemonic of the category.    A Lookup is
                      available.

                      Note:   You can identify only categories in
                              departments to which you are given access in the
                              MIS User Dictionary. If you try to identify a
                              category in a department to which you have not
                              been given access, this message appears:

                                    [User name] does not have access to
                                    [category's] department.


From Service Date     Enter the service date at which you want to start
                      the report, using the standard format or a T
                      combination.


Thru Service Date     Enter the service date on which you want to end the
                      report, using the standard format or a T combination.

After you enter the range of dates for the report, this message appears:

                      Print on:

                      Enter the mnemonic of the printer on which you want to
                      print the report.
Incomplete Procedures Report (by status) (9.2)                               Page 206



9.2:       Incomplete Procedures Report (by status)


This routine allows you to print a report, for a specific department or a
specific category, of all incomplete procedures. A procedure is considered
incomplete if it has a status of:

                     T - Transmitted
                     L - Logged
                     I - In Process

This report sorts incomplete procedures by department or category. To obtain
reports sorted by Care Area or patient, use the routine called List Incomplete
Orders (by patient).

The Incomplete Procedures Report shows:

       *   the   status                   * the patient's name and account number
       *   the   order number             * the ordering doctor
       *   the   procedure                * any comments
       *   the   priority and quantity      (for example: cancelled, cancellation
       *   the   service date and time       requested, duplicate)

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                    List Incomplete Procedures (by status)                     |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|Procedure                                                                      |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Department/Category          You can identify a department or a category.


                            Identifying a Department

                            Under some circumstances, the mnemonic for a department
                            appears at this prompt. If you want to print incomplete
                            procedures for that department, press <Enter>. If you
                            want to print incomplete procedures for a different
                            department, delete the default response and follow the
                            directions below.

                            If no department name appears, enter a mnemonic, from
                            the Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that
                            identifies the department for which you want to print
                            incomplete procedures. A Lookup is available.
Incomplete Procedures Report (by status) (9.2)                           Page 207




                      Note:   You can identify only departments to
                              which you are explicitly given access in the MIS
                              User Dictionary, at the "Access to OE routines
                              for departments:" prompt. If you try to identify
                              a department to which you have not been given
                              access, this message appears:

                                   [User name] does not have access to
                                   [department name]


                      Identifying a Category

                      If you want to identify a category instead   of a
                      department, delete the default response to   this prompt,
                      if any. Enter the letter C, followed by a    space,
                      followed by the mnemonic of the category.    A Lookup is
                      available.

                      Note:   You can identify only categories in
                              departments to which you are given access in the
                              MIS User Dictionary. If you try to identify a
                              category in a department to which you have not
                              been given access, this message appears:

                                   [User name] does not have access to
                                   [category's] department.


Procedure All         Press <Enter> if you want a list of all incomplete
                      procedures in the category you listed above.

                      If you want to restrict the list to one procedure,
                      delete All and enter the procedure mnemonic or a
                      pound sign (#) followed by the number of the procedure
                      associated with the specified category. A Lookup of
                      procedures in the selected category is available.

After you enter the department or category and procedure for which you want to
see incomplete procedures, this message appears:

                      Print on:

                      Enter the mnemonic of the printer on which you want to
                      print the report.
Overdue Procedures Report (9.3)                                            Page 208



9.3:    Overdue Procedures Report


This routine allows you to print a report of all overdue procedures for a
specific department or a specific category.

A procedure is overdue if its status has been In Process for longer than the
time specified in the Procedure Dictionary at the TURNAROUND TIME prompt.

The Overdue Procedures Report shows:

       * the order number                   * the   number of hours by which
       * the service date and time            the   procedure is overdue
       * the date and time at which the     * the   turnaround time specified in
         order status became "In Process"     the   Procedure Dictionary
       * the user who changed the order     * the   priority and quantity
         status to "In Process"             * the   patient name and account number
       * the procedure                      * the   ordering doctor

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                            List Overdue Procedures                            |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Department/Category      You can identify a department or a category.


                        Identifying a Department

                        Under some circumstances, the mnemonic for a department
                        appears at this prompt. If you want to print an Overdue
                        Procedures Report for that department, press <Enter>.
                        If you want to print an Overdue Procedures Report for a
                        different department, delete the default response and
                        follow the directions below.

                        If no department name appears, enter a mnemonic, from
                        the Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that
                        identifies the department for which you want to print a
                        Billing List. A Lookup is available.

                        Note:   You can identify only departments to
                                which you are explicitly given access in the MIS
                                User Dictionary, at the "Access to OE routines
                                for departments:" prompt. If you try to identify
                                a department to which you have not been given
Overdue Procedures Report (9.3)                                          Page 209



                              access, this message appears:

                                   [User name] does not have access to
                                   [department name]


                      Identifying a Category

                      If you want to identify a category instead   of a
                      department, delete the default response to   this prompt,
                      if any. Enter the letter C, followed by a    space,
                      followed by the mnemonic of the category.    A Lookup is
                      available.

                      Note:   You can identify only categories in
                              departments to which you are given access in the
                              MIS User Dictionary. If you try to identify a
                              category in a department to which you have not
                              been given access, this message appears:

                                   [User name] does not have access to
                                   [category's] department.

After you enter the department or category for which you want to see overdue
procedures, this message appears:

                      Print on:

                      Enter the mnemonic of the printer on which you want to
                      print the report.
Uncharged Procedures Report (9.4)                                          Page 210



9.4:       Uncharged Procedures Report


This routine allows you to print a report, for a specific department or a
specific category, of all procedures that are defined as charge editable in the
Procedure Dictionary and have not yet been charged.

The Uncharged Procedures Report shows:

       *   the order number                * the user who changed the status
       *   the procedure number              to "Complete"
       *   the priority and quantity       * the patient's name and account number
       *   the service date and time       * the ordering doctor
       *   the date and time that the
           order was completed

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           List Uncharged Procedures                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Department/Category         You can identify a department or a category.


                           Identifying a Department

                           Under some circumstances, the mnemonic for a department
                           appears at this prompt. If you want to list uncharged
                           procedures for that department, press <Enter>. If you
                           want to list uncharged procedures for a different
                           department, delete the default response and follow the
                           directions below.

                           If no department name appears, enter a mnemonic, from
                           the Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that
                           identifies the department for which you want to list
                           Billing List. A Lookup is available.
                           uncharged procedures.
Uncharged Procedures Report (9.4)                                         Page 211



                      Note:   You can identify only departments to
                              which you are explicitly given access in the MIS
                              User Dictionary, at the "Access to OE routines
                              for departments:" prompt. If you try to identify
                              a department to which you have not been given
                              access, this message appears:

                                    [User name] does not have access to
                                    [department name]


                      Identifying a Category

                      If you want to identify a category instead   of a
                      department, delete the default response to   this prompt,
                      if any. Enter the letter C, followed by a    space,
                      followed by the mnemonic of the category.    A Lookup is
                      available.

                      Note:   You can identify only categories in
                              departments to which you are given access in the
                              MIS User Dictionary. If you try to identify a
                              category in a department to which you have not
                              been given access, this message appears:

                                    [User name] does not have access to
                                    [category's] department.

After you enter the department or category for which you want to see uncharged
procedures, this message appears:

                      Print on:

Enter the mnemonic of the printer on which you want to print the report.
Cancelled Procedures report (9.5)                                      Page 212



9.5:   Cancelled Procedures report


This routine allows you to print a report of all orders that were deleted or
cancelled, or for which a cancellation request or denial of cancellation
request was entered. You specify a Department or a category for which you want
to see the report and a range of service dates.

The Cancelled Procedures Report shows:

          * the cancellation status (deleted, cancelled, cancellation
            requested or request for cancellation denied)
          * the order number
          * the procedure
          * the priority and quantity
          * the status (Transmitted, Logged, In Process, Completed or
              Cancelled)
          * the patient's name and account number
          * the ordering doctor
          * the reason for cancellation, cancellation request, or denial of
            cancellation request
          * the user who requested the cancellation

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           List Cancelled Procedures                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|From Cancel Date                                                               |
|Thru Cancel Date                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Department/Category     You can identify a department or a category.


                       Identifying a Department

                       Under some circumstances, the mnemonic for a department
                       appears at this prompt. If you want to list cancelled
                       procedures for that department, press <Enter>. If you
                       want to list cancelled procedures for a different
                       department, delete the default response and follow the
                       directions below.

                       If no department name appears, enter a mnemonic, from
                       the Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that
                       identifies the department for which you want to list
Cancelled Procedures report (9.5)                                         Page 213



                      cancelled procedures.    A Lookup is available.

                      Note:   You can identify only departments to
                              which you are explicitly given access in the MIS
                              User Dictionary, at the "Access to OE routines
                              for departments:" prompt. If you try to identify
                              a department to which you have not been given
                              access, this message appears:

                                    [User name] does not have access to
                                    [department name]


                      Identifying a Category

                      If you want to identify a category instead   of a
                      department, delete the default response to   this prompt,
                      if any. Enter the letter C, followed by a    space,
                      followed by the mnemonic of the category.    A Lookup is
                      available.

                      Note:   You can identify only categories in
                              departments to which you are given access in the
                              MIS User Dictionary. If you try to identify a
                              category in a department to which you have not
                              been given access, this message appears:

                                    [User name] does not have access to
                                    [category's] department.


From Cancel Date      Enter the date at which you want to start the
                      report, using the standard format or a T combination.


Thru Cancel Date      Enter the date on which you want the report to end,
                      using the standard format or a T combination.

After you enter the date(s) for listing cancelled orders, this message appears:

                      Print on:

                      Enter the mnemonic of the printer on which you want to
                      print the report.
Daily Log (9.6)                                                        Page 214



9.6:   Daily Log


This routine allows you to print a report of all the procedures ordered by a
specific department or in a specific category, for a specific service date.

The Daily Log shows:

          * the order number
          * the service time
          * the procedure
          * the priority and quantity
          * the status (Transmitted, Logged, In Process, Completed, Cancelled)
          * the patient's name and account number
          * the ordering doctor
          * comments (such as the date of cancellation or request for
              cancellation)
          * supplemental text (for Nursing intervention procedures)

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                List Daily Log                                 |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|Service Date                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Include Detail                                                                 |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Department/Category    You can identify a department or a category.


                       Identifying a Department

                       Under some circumstances, the mnemonic for a department
                       appears at this prompt. If you want to print a Daily
                       Log for that department, press <Enter>. If you want to
                       print a Daily Log for a different department, delete the
                       default response and follow the directions below.

                       If no department name appears, enter a mnemonic, from
                       the Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that
                       identifies the department for which you want to print a
                       Daily Log. A Lookup is available.
Daily Log (9.6)                                                          Page 215



                      Note:   You can identify only departments to
                              which you are explicitly given access in the MIS
                              User Dictionary, at the "Access to OE routines
                              for departments:" prompt. If you try to identify
                              a department to which you have not been given
                              access, this message appears:

                                   [User name] does not have access to
                                   [department name]


                      Identifying a Category

                      If you want to identify a category instead   of a
                      department, delete the default response to   this prompt,
                      if any. Enter the letter C, followed by a    space,
                      followed by the mnemonic of the category.    A Lookup is
                      available.

                      Note:   You can identify only categories in
                              departments to which you are given access in the
                              MIS User Dictionary. If you try to identify a
                              category in a department to which you have not
                              been given access, this message appears:

                                   [User name] does not have access to
                                   [category's] department.


Service Date          Enter the date for which you want to print the Daily
                      Log, using the standard format or a T combination.


Include Detail        Enter N if you do not want to see the queries
                      associated with each order, and the responses to those
                      queries.

                      If you want to see the queries associated with each
                      order, and the responses to those queries, enter Y.

After you enter the date(s) for which you want to see the Daily Log, this
message appears:

                      Print on

Enter the mnemonic, from the Device Table, of the printer on which you want to
print the report.
Medical Necessity Report (9.7)                                            Page 216



9.7:   Medical Necessity Report


This routine allows you to print a report of all orders for which a Medical
Necessity evaluation was performed. The Medical Necessity evaluation is done
based on the Patient's status and Insurance.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           Medical Necessity Report                            |
|===============================================================================|
|From Date                                                                      |
|Thru Date                                                                      |
|                                                                               |
|Printed, Signed, Passed or All                                                 |
|                                                                               |
|Include Deleted Orders                                                         |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


From Date              Enter the start date to print orders which have been
                       evaluated for Medical Necessity. Using the standard
                       date format or a T combination.


Thru Date              Enter the end date to print orders which have been
                       evaluated for Medical Necessity. Using the standard
                       date format or a T combination.


Printed, Signed       Enter the status of the order you would like to
Passed or All         display. The choices are as follows:

                      Printed - Orders for which an acceptable diagnosis
                                was not entered and an ABN was printed but not
                                signed by the patient

                      Signed      - Orders for which an acceptable diagnosis
                                    was not entered and an ABN was printed and
                                    signed by the patient.

                      Passed      - Orders for which an acceptable diagnosis
                                    was entered.

                      All         - Orders with statuses of either Printed,
                                    Signed, or Passed as a result of the Medical
                                    Necessity evaluation.


Include Deleted       Enter Y to include deleted orders that required
Medical Necessity Report (9.7)                                        Page 217



Orders               a Medical Necessity evaluation. Enter N to not
                     include deleted orders on the report.
Monitoring Billing (10)                                                Page 218



Chapter 10:   Monitoring Billing


Two routines allow users to monitor billing of charges for patient care to
patients' accounts. Through the routines, users can:

     * view all current charges and credits for a patient, by department

     * print a list of all orders entered from a specific department during a
       specific range of dates



Routine Summary:   Monitoring Billing

The following table provides guidelines about which routine to choose to
perform a specific function.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                  Monitoring Billing: Tasks and Routines
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
To Perform This Function                       Use

View all current charges and credits           View Patient Billing Activity
for a specific patient, by category
and procedure


List charges and credits recorded              Print Billing List
for a specific department or category
during a specific range of dates

Enter multiple charges for a single patient    Enter Department Charges

Enter multiple charges for many patients       Enter Department Charges (Batch)

Associate an order with the name of the        Record Performing Doctor
provider who performed the procedure

Associate a performing doctor's name with     Record Performing Doctor (Batch)
one or more orders, if desired, update
order status to complete

List orders requiring a performing             List Orders Missing Performing
physician that lake that information           Doctor

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
View Patient Billing Activity (10.1)                                      Page 219



10.1:     View Patient Billing Activity


This routine allows users to see all the current charges and credits for a
specific patient by procedure. A Department or Category must be specified, and
a range of dates.

In addition to the department name, the category of orders, and the patient
name and account number, the Patient Billing Activity report provides this
information for each transaction:

     *   activity date               * quantity
     *   order number                * amount
     *   procedure name              * whether transaction was performed manually
     *   procedure number              or automatically
     *   unit cost                   * initials of user who performed transaction


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                 View Patient Billing Activity (by department)                 |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Patient                                                                        |
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|From Activity Date                                                             |
|Thru Activity Date                                                             |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Patient                 Identify a patient to view charges and credits.
                        Users restriced by location can only identify patients
                        at the location of the terminal being used.
Print Billing List (10.2)                                                Page 220



10.2:    Print Billing List


This routine allows the user to print a list of charges and credits recorded
for all orders in a specific department or category during a specific range of
dates. In addition to the department name and the category of orders, the
Billing List provides the following information for each transaction:

     *   Activity date                       * Amount charged or paid
     *   Order number                        * Whether transaction was performed
     *   Procedure                             manually or automatically
     *   Procedure number                    * Initials of user who performed
     *   Patient's name and account number     transaction
     *   Quantity of procedure


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                              Print Billing List                               |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|From Activity Date                                                             |
|Thru Activity Date                                                             |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Department/Category    Identify a department or a category.


                       Identifying a Department

                       Depending on the restrictions defined for the user and
                       location, the mnemonic for a department appears at this
                       prompt. To view patient billing activity for that
                       department, press <Enter>. To view patient billing
                       activity for a different department, delete the default
                       response and follow the directions below.

                       If a department name does not display, enter the location
                       mnemonic from the MIS Location Dictionary of the
                       department to view patient billing activity. A Lookup is
                       available.

                       NOTE: If a user is restricted, only departments
                       assigned to the user at the "Access to OE routines for
                       departments:" prompt in the MIS User Dictionary are
                       available. When identifying a department that a user does
                       not have access to, this message displays:
Print Billing List (10.2)                                               Page 221




                     [User name] does not have access to [department name]

                     Identifying a Category

                     To identify a category instead of a department, delete
                     the default response to this prompt, if any. Enter the
                     letter C, followed by a space, followed by the mnemonic
                     of the category. A Lookup is available.

                     NOTE: If a user is restricted, only the categories
                     in departments the user has been given access to in the
                     MIS User Dictionary are available. When identifying a
                     category in a department the user does not have access
                     to, this message displays:

                     [User name] does not have access to [category's]
                     department.


From Activity Date   Enter the date on which to begin the Billing List
                     using the standard date format or a T combination.


Thru Activity Date   Enter the date to end the Billing List using
                     the standard date format or a T combination.
Enter Department Charges (10.3)                                       Page 222



10.3:   Enter Department Charges


This streamlined charge entry routine allows users to efficiently enter
multiple charges for a single patient. After defining the patient and category
information once, an unlimited number of charges may be entered in that
category for that patient.


Capturing Charges for Timed Procedures

The health care organization may have procedures for which the charge varies,
based on the duration of the procedure. For example, users may vary the charge
for recovery room service, depending on the length of time a patient spends in
the room. Users must handle timed and untimed procedures differently both
during dictionary setup and during charge entry.


Entering Charges for Timed Procedures

With timed procedures, the charge amount varies according to the length of time
required to perform the service. During charge entry, after identifying a
timed procedure, the user defines the duration of time for which to charge the
patient. In a pop-up window, the user enters the start and stop date and time.
The system then calculates the duration of the procedure and enters the
appropriate charge at the AMOUNT field. For more details on entering
charges for timed procedures, please see the documentation at the PROCEDURE
prompt.


Entering Charges for Untimed Procedures

During charge entry, the user simply records the fact that the procedure
occurred, without regard for the length of time required to perform the
service. Users can classify untimed procedures as either CHARGE EDITABLE or
NON-CHARGE EDITABLE. A non-charge editable procedure has a fixed charge
associated with it anytime it is administered. For example, the health care
organization may always charge $75.00 for an EKG procedure.

If the procedure's price can vary based on factors other than time, users can
define the procedure as charge editable in the Procedure Dictionary. Doing so
allows the user to edit the charge amount if appropriate during charge entry.
Enter Department Charges (10.3)                                         Page 223




Changing the Patient Name Before Filing Orders

If the user notices the wrong patient was selected prior to filing the orders,
the user can correct the patient name by following these steps:

1.   Press <PREV FIELD> repeatedly to move the cursor backward a field at a
     time. When pressing this key at the ORDER DR field, a pop-up window like
     the one below appears:

        +-----------------------------------------------------+
        !                                                     !
        ! CHANGE PATIENT TO __________________________        !
        !                                                     !
        +-----------------------------------------------------+

2.   Identify the correct patient using any patient identification method.

     The pop-up window disappears and the correct patient's name appears at the
     PATIENT prompt.
Enter Department Charges (10.3)                                         Page 224

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                  Enter Department Charges                                  |
|============================================================================================|
|Category                                                   A/S               Admit          |
|                                                           Loc               Status         |
|Default Service Date                                       Rm                               |
|                                                           Bd                Unit #         |
|Patient                                                                                     |
|                                                                                            |
|Ordering Dr                                                Default Campus                   |
|Ask Performing Dr?          ault Performing Dr                                              |
|                                                                                            |
|    Procedure/                                                                              |
|Txn Campus      Procedure Nm / B/AR Cmt        Qty Date        Amount     Performing Dr     |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Category               Identify the category containing the procedures for
                       which the patient is charged.


Default Service Date   Enter a default service date for the procedures to be
                       entered. This date appears in the DATE field for each
                       procedure the user enters below. Users can edit the date
                       as they enter individual procedures. If the user does
                       not enter a date, the routine is terminated.


Patient                Identify the patient being charged for these
                       procedures.

                       Upon identifying the patient, this patient registration
                       information appears on the screen:

                         Age and Sex (A/S)     Admission Date
                         Hospital Location     Status
Enter Department Charges (10.3)                                        Page 225



                        Room Number            Unit Number
                        Bed Number             Attending Doctor


Order Dr              Depending on how the health care organization sets
                      system parameters:

                      1) this field is blank

                         Enter the mnemonic from the Provider Dictionary that
                         defines the doctor who is ordering this procedure. A
                         Lookup is available.

                      2) the ordering doctor is the default response

                         If the Ordering Doctor is different from the
                         Attending Doctor, delete the mnemonic for the
                         Attending Doctor. Enter a mnemonic from the Provider
                         Dictionary that defines the doctor who is ordering
                         this procedure. A Lookup is available. Upon entering
                         the mnemonic, the full name of the doctor appears
                         beside it.


Default Campus        Enter a default Campus for the procedures to be
                      entered. This Campus appears in the CAMPUS field for
                      each procedure you enter below. You can edit the campus
                      as you enter individual procedures.


Ask Perf Doctor       Enter Y for the cursor to stop at the PERFORMING
                      DOCTOR prompt for each procedure. This is an appropriate
                      response if the performing doctor must be collected for
                      billing purposes.

                      Enter N to bypass the PERFORMING DOCTOR prompt when
                      entering procedures.


Default Perf Doctor   The cursor stops here only if the ASK PERFORMING
                      DOCTOR? prompt is defined Y. Identify the provider to
                      associate with this procedure.

                      The provider's name appears as the default at the
                      PERFORMING DR prompt. This provider may be edited while
                      entering procedures. A Lookup to the MIS Provider
                      Dictionary is available.


-------------PROCEDURE INFORMATION------------------------
Enter Department Charges (10.3)                                         Page 226



After you complete the category and patient information, you can enter a list
of charges for this category and patient. You can enter an unlimited number of
charges in the current category for the current patient.


Procedure            Identify the procedure for which the patient is being
                     charged.

                     Lookup:   procedures in the selected category

                     NOTE:   In addition to the standard Lookup, users can
                             use one of the following methods:

                                             Full          Partial
                     Lookup Method           Lookup        Lookup

                     alphabetically by        <Lookup>      [chars]<Lookup>
                     procedure name                         (e.g., EL<Lookup>)

                     numerically by          #<Lookup>     #[num]<Lookup>
                     procedure number                      (e.g., #500<Lookup>)


                     For Timed Procedures

                     If a procedure is defined in the Procedure Dictionary as
                     a timed procedure, a pop-up window appears. Use the
                     pop-up window to define the duration for which the
                     patient is charged.

                     TIMED PROCEDURE POP-UP WINDOW

                     START DATE/TIME and STOP DATE/TIME

                     Enter the date and time that the procedure began and
                     ended. For example, you wish to enter a charge for an
                     Oxygen Therapy procedure. Assume that in the Procedure
                     Dictionary, you defined this procedure as charge
                     editable, with a charge of $50.00 for an initial time
                     block of 30 minutes, and $25.00 for each additional time
                     block of 15 minutes.

                     Within the pop-up screen enter the start date/time and
                     stop date/time. The system will calculate the following
                     information:

                               *   The elapsed time of the procedure
                               *   The quantity and dollar amount charged for the
                                   initial time block
                               *   The quantity and dollar amount charged for the
Enter Department Charges (10.3)                                        Page 227



                                  additional time blocks
                              *   The total quantity and dollar amount charged
                                  for this procedure

                   After you enter the charge information, the pop-up window
                   disappears and the correct charge information appears in
                   the QTY and AMOUNT fields on the main screen.




Campus               The Default Campus will appear and may be edited by
                     the user. A lookup into the Campus Dictionary is
                     available.


Quantity             The cursor stops here only for non-timed procedures
                     with a Y at the ASK QUANTITY prompt in the
                     Procedure Dictionary. Enter the number of times the
                     procedure was performed.


Date                 Enter the date on which a user would like this
                     procedure to be performed, using a T combination or the
                     standard date format (MM/DD/YY or, outside the U.S.A.,
                     DD/MM/YY). To recall the last date entered in this
                     ordering session, delete the default date and press the
                     <Get> key. Upon pressing <Enter>, leaving the default
                     response as is, the order is entered for the current date
                     or default date if one had been defined.


Amount               This prompt behaves differently depending on how you
                     define the procedure in the Procedure Dictionary.

                     If the Procedure is              This Happens:
                     Charge Editable and Timed        The correct charge amount
                                                      appears, based on the
                                                      duration information
                                                      entered in the pop-up
                                                      screen.

                                                       The charge amount may not
                                                       be edited at the
                                                       AMOUNT prompt.

                                                       To change the charge
                                                       amount, redefine the
                                                       procedure's duration by
Enter Department Charges (10.3)                                          Page 228



                                                         using <Prev Fld> to
                                                         return to the pop-up
                                                         window.

                      Charge Editable & Not Timed     The unit price from the
                                                      Procedure Dictionary
                                                      appears. Edit the amount
                                                      if necessary.

                      Not Charge Editable                The cursor bypasses this
                                                         field.


Performing Doctor    The cursor stops here if "Y" is entered at the ASK
                     PERFORMING DOCTOR? prompt above. If users entered a
                     default performing doctor, that doctor's mnemonic and
                     name is displayed here. Edit the performing doctor if
                     appropriate.

                     Lookup:   MIS Provider Dictionary


B/AR Comment         The cursor stops here only for timed and charge
                     editable procedures. Use this field to indicate to the
                     Billing Department anything unusual about the procedure.
                     For example, you might use this space to note that a
                     patient is correctly being charged twice for the same
                     procedure, or to explain the exact nature of a
                     miscellaneous charge.
Enter Department Charges (batch) (10.4)                                Page 229



10.4:   Enter Department Charges (batch)


The Enter Department Charges Routine allows you to efficiently enter multiple
charges for many patients. Use this routine to enter charges for several
patients who received exactly the same procedures. Note that if any procedures
are timed, each patient must have received the procedure for the same length of
time. You cannot vary the charge amount by patient.

The screen can be divided into three sections. In the top part of the screen,
you define the category, service date, performing doctor, campus, and whether
the name of the attending doctor defaults in as the ordering doctor. In the
middle section of the screen, you list the procedures that are being charged
for in this category. In the bottom section of the screen, you associate a
list of patients with the list of procedures.

Building Charges for Batches of Timed Procedures

The Enter Department Charges (Batch) Routine handles timed procedures
differently from the Enter Department Charges Routine in the following way.

In the Enter Department Charges Routine, the user enters the start and end
date and time for the procedure, and the system calculates the procedure's
duration and the appropriate charge. In the Enter Department Charges (Batch)
Routine, when a user identifies a timed procedure, the system supplies the
charge for the initial time block only. The user must calculate the charge
amount if the procedure continued for longer than the initial time block.

For example, assume you enter the mnemonic for Oxygen Therapy, which you
previously defined as a timed procedure in the Procedure Dictionary.

When you enter the mnemonic for Oxygen Therapy at the PROCEDURE prompt, the
initial charge of $50.00 appears. If the procedure continued for 2 hours, you
must change the amount to $200.00 (the initial charge of $50.00 for the first
30 minutes, plus an additional $25.00 for each additional 15 minute time
block.)

You can enter an unlimited number of charges on this list.

Associating a Batch of Charges With a List of Patients

After defining the category, and listing the procedures being charged for,
associate the list of charges with a list of patients. Use the lower third of
the screen to enter an unlimited number of patient names, and their ordering
doctors.
Enter Department Charges (batch) (10.4)                                  Page 230

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Enter Department Charges (Batch)                             |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|Category                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|Service Date             Campus                                                             |
|                                                                                            |
|Performing Doctor                                                                           |
|                                                                                            |
|Default Ordering Doctor To Attending Doctor?                                                |
|                                                                                            |
|Txn Procedure   Procedure Name                  Qty Amount    B/AR Comment                  |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Cnt Patient                                      Ordering Doctor                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Category              Enter the category of the orders that the user would
                      like to enter charges for. A Lookup is available.


Service Date          Enter or edit the service date of the order, using
                      the standard date format or a T combination.


Campus                Enter a Campus to be associated to all the procedures
                      entered. A Lookup into the Campus Dictionary is
                      available.


Performing Doctor     Identify the Performing Doctor that will be
                      associated with all procedures. A Lookup to the MIS
                      Provider Dictionary is available.


Default Ordering      A "Y" or "N" response is required at this field.
Doctor To Attending   Upon entering a "Y", the Attending Doctor will
Enter Department Charges (batch) (10.4)                                  Page 231



Doctor?              default into the Ordering Doctor section below.
                     Upon entering a "N", the Ordering Doctor section
                     below will remain blank until the user enters the
                     Ordering Doctor.


Procedure            Identify the procedures for which the patient(s) are
                     being charged. A Lookup of procedures in the selected
                     category is available.

                     NOTE:   In addition to the standard Lookup, users can
                                 use one of the following methods:

                                           Full          Partial
                     LOOKUP Method         LOOKUP        LOOKUP

                     alphabetically by     <Lookup>     [chars]<Lookup>
                     procedure name                     (e.g., EL<Lookup>)

                     numerically by       #<Lookup>     #[num]<Lookup>
                     procedure number                   (e.g., #500<Lookup>)


Quantity             The cursor stops here only for non-timed procedures
                     with a Y at the ASK QUANTITY prompt in the Procedure
                     Dictionary. Enter the number of times the procedure was
                     performed.


Amount               The amount defined in the Procedure Dictionary will
                     default. If Charge Editable "N" the user will not be
                     allowed to edit the charge. If Charge Editable "Y" the
                     charge may be edited. If the procedure is defined as a
                     Timed Charge the initial time block amount will appear.


B/AR Comment         The cursor stops here only for timed and charge
                     editable procedures. Use this field to indicate to the
                     Billing Department anything unusual about the procedure.
                     For example, you might use this space to note that a
                     patient is correctly being charged twice for the same
                     procedure, or to explain the exact nature of a
                     miscellaneous charge.


Patient              Identify the patient(s) being charged for these
                     procedures.

                     There are several ways to identify a patient:
Enter Department Charges (batch) (10.4)                                 Page 232



                             1 - by account number

                             2 - by social security number

                             3 - by unit number
                                 Enter U#, followed by the unit number.

                             4 - by full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,
                                 MIDDLEINITIAL format, using up to 43
                                 characters

                             5 - by partial name

                             6 - by recalling the last patient entered in the
                                 current terminal session
                                 Press the spacebar, then press <ENTER>.

Upon identifying the patient, this patient registration information appears on
the screen:

                        Age and Sex (A/S)     Admission Date
                        Hospital Location     Status
                        Room Number           Unit Number
                        Bed Number            Attending Doctor


Ordering Doctor      The user may enter the ordering doctor at this
                     prompt. Upon entering a "Y" at the Default Ordering
                     Doctor To Attending Doctor? prompt, the Attending Doctor
                     will automatically default. A Lookup is also available.
Record Performing Physician (10.5)                                      Page 233



10.5:   Record Performing Physician


Use this routine to associate a performing doctor's name with procedures. Users
may need to enter a performing doctor's name after an order is placed to ensure
proper billing for the procedure. Whether or not a Performing Doctor's name is
required is determined in two places: The OE Procedure Dictionary, and the
Billing Procedure Dictionary.


When Orders Require a Performing Doctor

Whether or not the performing doctor is required is determined by the B/AR
Module. Users define in the Procedure Dictionary whether the Billing staff
needs to have a performing doctor to bill for the procedure's Hospital
component. If Y appears at the PERFORMING DR field, the charge for the
Hospital component is not collected by the Billing Module until a performing
doctor is entered for the procedure.


How Orders Requiring a Performing Doctor Are Flagged

In the procedure Dictionary, the PERFORMING DR prompt can require the
performing physician to be recorded in OE. Certain forms in the Billing
department require the performing doctor for reimbursement and insurance
purposes. Orders that require performing physician but are nonetheless entered
without one are picked up on the Orders Missing Performing Doctor Report.


Collecting Performing Physician During Order Entry

In order for users to record the Performing Doctor's name as they enter orders,
follow these guidelines:

1.   Define a query asking for the performing doctor. The query should be
     a Pointer-type query, referring to the MIS Provider Dictionary for its
     response.

2.   Contact your MEDITECH applications consultant, who will identify the
     appropriate query in the OE parameters for collecting the Performing
     Physician.

3.   Place this query on the customer-defined portion of the screen for the
     procedure.

4.   When a user enters an order for the procedure, he/she is prompted to
     enter the Performing Physician, and the user's response is collected
     by B/AR along with the order.

If the performing physician is not recorded during order entry, the physician
may be recorded later via this routine.
Record Performing Physician (10.5)                                       Page 234

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                Record Performing Physician                                 |
|============================================================================================|
|User                                                                                        |
|                                                                                            |
|Category                                                                                    |
|Order                                                                                       |
|                                                                                            |
|       ------------------Patient------------------                                          |
|Status Name                           Account No   Procedure                      Perform Dr|
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Category             Identify the category of the order whose Performing
                     Physician the user would like to record. A Lookup is
                     available.



Order                Enter the number of the order for which the user
                     would like to record the performing physician. A Lookup
                     is available.

                     NOTE:   If the user does not know the order number,
                             but know the approximate date, they might want to
                             look up by date of order. To do so, enter 4
                             digits that represent the month and day. For
                             example:

                             Enter 0730 for a LOOKUP starting with orders
                             entered on July 30.

Upon entering the order number, the bottom half of the screen displays
information about the order, and the cursor proceeds to the PERFORM DR
prompt.


Perform Dr           Enter the menmonic of the physician who performed
                     this order. A Lookup into the Provider Dictionary is
                     available.
Record Performing Physician (batch) (10.6)                              Page 235



10.6:   Record Performing Physician (batch)


Use this routine to associate a performing doctor's name with one or more
orders. Users may need to enter a performing doctor's name after an order is
placed to ensure proper billing for the procedure. Whether or not a Performing
Doctor's name is required is determined in two places: The OE Procedure
Dictionary, and the Billing Procedure Dictionary.


When Orders Require a Performing Doctor

Whether or not the performing doctor is required is determined by the B/AR
Module. Users define in the Procedure Dictionary whether the Billing staff
needs to have a performing doctor to bill for the procedure's Hospital
component. If Y appears at the PERFORMING DR field, the charge for the
Hospital component is not collected by the Billing Module until a performing
doctor is entered for the procedure.


How Orders Requiring a Performing Doctor Are Flagged

In the procedure Dictionary, the PERFORMING DR prompt can require the
performing physician to be recorded in OE. Certain forms in the Billing
department require the performing doctor for reimbursement and insurance
purposes. Orders that require performing physician but are nonetheless entered
without one are picked up on the Orders Missing Performing Doctor Report.


Collecting Performing Physician During Order Entry

In order for users to record the Performing Doctor's name as they enter orders,
follow these guidelines:

1.   Define a query asking for the performing doctor. The query should be
     a Pointer-type query, referring to the MIS Provider Dictionary for its
     response.

2.   Contact your MEDITECH applications consultant, who will identify the
     appropriate query in the OE parameters for collecting the Performing
     Physician.

3.   Place this query on the customer-defined portion of the screen for the
     procedure.

4.   When a user enters an order for the procedure, he/she is prompted to
     enter the Performing Physician, and the user's response is collected
     by B/AR along with the order.

If the performing physician is not recorded during order entry, the physician
may be recorded later via this routine.
Record Performing Physician (batch) (10.6)                             Page 236

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                              Record Performing Physican (Batch)                            |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|User                                                                                        |
|                                                                                            |
|Category                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|Performing Dr                                                                               |
|                                                                                            |
|                       ----------------Patient---------------                               |
|Order         Cmpl Sts Name                      Account No   Procedure                     |
|                        7                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                        7                                                                   |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Category             Identify a category containing orders that users
                     would like to associate with a performing physician.



Performing Doctor    Enter the mnemonic of the provider to associate to
                     orders entered. A Lookup to the MIS Provider Dictionary
                     is available.


Order                Enter the order number of a procedure that the user
                     would like to associate with the doctor named at the
                     PERFORMING DOCTOR prompt.

                     Lookup:   The Lookup will display all orders that require
                               a Performing Provider by order number.
                               ie: 0501-0001 would be the first order placed
                               on May 1. The Lookup will not display orders
                               that have been cancelled or orders that do not
                               require a Performing Physician. The Lookup is
                               restricted to those orders that require a
                               Performing Physician.


                     NOTE:     If the user does not know the order number, but
                               know the approximate date, he or she may find it
                               useful to display the Lookup by order date. To
Record Performing Physician (batch) (10.6)                             Page 237



                               do so, enter four digits representing the month
                               and day.

                               For example, enter 0730 for a Lookup starting
                               with orders entered on July 30.

Upon identifying an order, the status, patient's name, account number, and
procedure name are displayed.




CMPL                 To update this order to COMPLETE status, and thus
                     generate a charge for this procedure, enter Y; otherwise
                     enter N.
List Orders Missing Performing Doctor (10.7)                            Page 238



10.7:   List Orders Missing Performing Doctor


This report lists orders which require the collection of a performing physician
and lack that information. The report ensures that required information is
being provided to the B/AR Module to complete the necessary insurance forms.

If the Performing Physician is not recorded at the time of Order Entry, you can
record the physician later via the Record Performing Physician routines.

This list provides the following information:

          *   order number
          *   status of the order
          *   patient's name, account number, and location
          *   procedure name
          *   billing number


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                     List Orders Missing Performing Doctor                     |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Department/Category    Identify a department or a category.


                       Identifying a Department

                       Under some circumstances, the mnemonic for a department
                       appears at this prompt. To view patient billing activity
                       for that department, press <Enter>. To view patient
                       billing activity for a different department, delete the
                       default response and follow the directions below.

                       If a department name does not display, enter the location
                       mnemonic from the MIS Location Dictionary of the
                       department to view patient billing activity. A Lookup is
                       available.

                       NOTE: If a user is restricted, only departments
                       assigned to the user at the "Access to OE routines for
                       departments:" prompt in the MIS User Dictionary are
                       available. When identifying a department that a user does
                       not have access to, this message displays:
List Orders Missing Performing Doctor (10.7)                            Page 239



                     [User name] does not have access to [department name]



                     To identify a category instead of a department, delete
                     the default response to this prompt, if any. Enter the
                     letter C, followed by a space, followed by the mnemonic
                     of the category. A Lookup is available.

                     NOTE: If a user is restricted, only the categories
                     in departments the user has been given access to in the
                     MIS User Dictionary are available. When identifying a
                     category in a department the user does not have access
                     to, this message displays:

                     [User name] does not have access to [category's]
                     department.
Reporting Statistics (11)                                                 Page 240



Chapter 11:     Reporting Statistics


Order Entry statistical reports provide Ancillary Department users with the
ability to track the procedures performed by their departments. Accurate
statistics can help managers pinpoiont workload fluctuations and schedule staff
more effectively.

The statistics reports breakdown data by:

             * quantity of the procedure ordered

             * the dollar amount for the quantity

             * the unit value for the quantity (unit value is defined in the
               Procedure Dictionary as the time ordinarily taken to complete
               the procedure)

The statistics can be viewed by:

             * Day                            * Doctor

             * General-Ledger Period          * Location

Order Entry statistical routines base statistics on the procedure's service
date. For example, if a user enters a charge or credit on a date other than a
procedure's service date, the corresponding statistics reflect the date the
procedure was performed (service date), not the date the charge or credit was
entered.

Order Entry statistics are generated as follows:

1.   A procedure is defined in the Procedure Dictionary as Charge Editable Y or
     N and has a Bill on Status.
2.   The order is placed on a patient with a Service Date of today.
3.   The orders status is then updated to the Bill on Status (or higher).
4.   The order is held by the system for the number of days defined at the
     DAYS TO UPDATE STATS prompt in the OE parameters.
5.   At midnight of the last day the statistics for that particular service date
     are compiled.

     NOTE:    Once a day is compiled no additional statistics will be added to
              that day.

Routine Summary:     Reporting Statistics

The routines for viewing statistics are described in this chapter. The table on
the next page provides guidelines about which routine to choose to perform a
specific function.
Reporting Statistics (11)                                              Page 241



-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                 Reporting Statistics: Tasks and Routines
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
To View Statistics On                     Use

Procedures ordered by a department        List Daily Procedure Statistics
or in a category on a selected date
or range of dates

Procedures ordered by a department        List Period Procedure Statistics
or in a category during a selected
general-ledger period

Procedures ordered by a doctor or a       List Doctor Statistics
group of doctors during a selected
general-ledger period

Procedures ordered by a location or       List Location Statistics
a range of locations during a selected
general-ledger period

Procedures ordered by a technician or     List Technician Statistics
a group of technicians during a
selected General Ledger period
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
List Daily Procedure Statistics (11.1)                                 Page 242



11.1:   List Daily Procedure Statistics


This routine prints data about the procedures ordered by a specific
department or in a specific category. You can ask for statistics for a range
of dates or for one particular date. This routine sorts procedures by day. If
you want data about procedures sorted by ledger period, use the Period
Procedure Statistics Routine.

A separate page of the report is devoted to each category. Each line of the
report corresponds to a single date, and shows these values for the procedure
in each of three Care Areas (Inpatient, Outpatient and Emergency Room):

              * the quantity, or number, of the procedure ordered
              * the dollar amount for that quantity (quantity x unit price)
              * the unit value for that quantity (quantity x unit value)
                (a unit value, or time ordinarily taken to complete
                 a procedure, can be set up in the Procedure Dictionary)

The report also includes totals of the values:

              * for each day
              * for each Care Area
              * for all days and all Care Areas


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                        List Daily Procedure Statistics                        |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Date                                                                      |
|Thru Date                                                                      |
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|Include Detail?                                                                |
|          Totals?                                                              |
|    Grand Total?                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


From Date              Enter the date at which you want to start listing
                       the daily procedure statistics, using the standard
                       date format or a T combination.


Thru Date              Enter the date on which you want to stop listing the
                       daily procedure statistics, using the standard date
                       format or a T combination.
List Daily Procedure Statistics (11.1)                                   Page 243



Department/Category    You can identify a department or a category.


                      Identifying a Department

                      Under some circumstances, the mnemonic for a department
                      appears at this prompt. If you want to list daily
                      procedure statistics for that department, press
                      <Enter>. If you want to list daily procedure
                      statistics for a different department, delete the
                      default response and follow the directions below.

                      If no department name appears, enter a mnemonic, from
                      the Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that
                      identifies the department for which you want to list
                      daily procedure statistics. A Lookup is available.

                      Note:   You can identify only departments to
                              which you are explicitly given access in the MIS
                              User Dictionary, at the "Access to OE routines
                              for departments:" prompt. If you try to identify
                              a department to which you have not been given
                              access, this message appears:

                                   [User name] does not have access to
                                   [department name]


                      Identifying a Category

                      If you want to identify a category instead   of a
                      department, delete the default response to   this prompt,
                      if any. Enter the letter C, followed by a    space,
                      followed by the mnemonic of the category.    A Lookup is
                      available.

                      Note:   You can identify only categories in
                              departments to which you are given access in the
                              MIS User Dictionary. If you try to identify a
                              category in a department to which you have not
                              been given access, this message appears:

                                   [User name] does not have access to
                                   [category's] department.


Detail                Enter Y if you would like the report to display the
                      details for each specific day.
List Daily Procedure Statistics (11.1)                                Page 244



Totals               Enter Y if you would like to receive a total per day
                     of the statistics on the report.


Grand Total          Enter Y if you would like to receive a Grand Total of
                     all the statistics for the date range chosen.
List Period Procedure Statistics (11.2)                                Page 245



11.2:   List Period Procedure Statistics


This routine prints data about the procedures ordered by a specific
department or in a specific category during a specific general ledger period.
If you want to a report with data sorted by day rather than by ledger period,
use the Daily Procedure Statistics Routine.

Each line of the report corresponds to a procedure, and shows these values for
the procedure in each of three Care Areas (Inpatient, Outpatient and Emergency
Room):

               * the quantity, or number, of the procedure ordered
               * the dollar amount for that quantity (quantity x unit price)
               * the unit value for that quantity (quantity x unit value)
                 (a unit value, or time ordinarily taken to complete a
                 procedure, can be set up in the Procedure Dictionary)

The report also includes totals of the values:

               *   by Care Area
               *   for each procedure
               *   for all procedures
               *   year-to-date for each procedure
               *   year-to-date for all procedures


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                       List Period Procedure Statistics                        |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Period                                                                         |
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


For Period              Use the Lookup to view a list of periods for which
                        you can order statistics about procedures. Enter the
                        mnemonic of the period of interest.
List Period Procedure Statistics (11.2)                                  Page 246



Department/Category   You can identify a department or a category.


                      Identifying a Department

                      Under some circumstances, the mnemonic for a department
                      appears at this prompt. If you want to print period
                      procedure statistics for that department, press
                      <Enter>. If you want to print period procedure
                      statistics for a different department, delete the
                      default response and follow the directions below.

                      If no department name appears, enter a mnemonic, from
                      the Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that
                      identifies the department for which you want to print
                      period procedure statistics. A Lookup is available.

                      Note:   You can identify only departments to
                              which you are explicitly given access in the MIS
                              User Dictionary, at the "Access to OE routines
                              for departments:" prompt. If you try to identify
                              a department to which you have not been given
                              access, this message appears:

                                   [User name] does not have access to
                                   [department name]


                      Identifying a Category

                      If you want to identify a category instead   of a
                      department, delete the default response to   this prompt,
                      if any. Enter the letter C, followed by a    space,
                      followed by the mnemonic of the category.    A Lookup is
                      available.

                      Note:   You can identify only categories in
                              departments to which you are given access in the
                              MIS User Dictionary. If you try to identify a
                              category in a department to which you have not
                              been given access, this message appears:

                                   [User name] does not have access to
                                   [category's] department.
List Doctor Statistics (11.3)                                           Page 247



11.3:    List Doctor Statistics


This routine prints data about the procedures ordered by a doctor or several
doctors during a specified general ledger period.

A separate page of the report is devoted to each category. Each line of the
report corresponds to an individual doctor, and shows these values for the
procedure in each of three Care Areas (Inpatient, Outpatient and Emergency
Room):

                * the quantity, or number, of the procedure ordered
                * the dollar amount for that quantity (quantity x unit price)
                * the unit value of that quantity (quantity x unit value)
                  (a unit value, or time ordinarily taken to complete a
                  procedure, can be set up in the Procedure Dictionary)

The report also includes totals of these values:

                *   by Care Area
                *   for each doctor
                *   for all doctors
                *   year-to-date for each doctor
                *   year-to-date for all doctors

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                            List Doctor Statistics                             |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Period                                                                         |
|                                                                               |
|Start Date                                                                     |
|End Date                                                                       |
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|From Doctor                                                                    |
|Thru Doctor                                                                    |
|                                                                               |
|Include Detail?                                                                |
|         Totals?                                                               |
|    Grand Total?                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Period                   Use the Lookup to view a list of periods for which
                         you can order statistics about procedures. Enter the
                         mnemonic of the period of interest.
List Doctor Statistics (11.3)                                              Page 248



Start Date            Enter a date which is at least today minus the
                      number of days for the statistics cutoff. (The
                      statistics cutoff is defined as the DAYS TO UPDATE STATS
                      prompt in the OE parameters.)


End Date              Enter a date   which is after the Start Date but
                      before today   minus the number of days for the statistics
                      cutoff. (The   statistics cutoff is defined as the DAYS TO
                      UPDATE STATS   prompt in the OE parameters.)


Department/Category    You can identify a department or a category.


                      Identifying a Department

                      Under some circumstances, the mnemonic for a department
                      appears at this prompt. If you want to list doctor
                      statistics for that department, press <Enter>. If you
                      want to list doctor statistics for a different
                      department, delete the default response and follow the
                      directions below.

                      If no department name appears, enter a mnemonic, from
                      the Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that
                      identifies the department for which you want to list
                      doctor statistics. A Lookup is available.

                      Note:     You can identify only departments to
                                which you are explicitly given access in the MIS
                                User Dictionary, at the "Access to OE routines
                                for departments:" prompt. If you try to identify
                                a department to which you have not been given
                                access, this message appears:

                                     [User name] does not have access to
                                     [department name]


                      Identifying a Category

                      If you want to identify a category instead   of a
                      department, delete the default response to   this prompt,
                      if any. Enter the letter C, followed by a    space,
                      followed by the mnemonic of the category.    A Lookup is
                      available.

                      Note:     You can identify only categories in
                                departments to which you are given access in the
List Doctor Statistics (11.3)                                              Page 249



                                MIS User Dictionary. If you try to identify a
                                category in a department to which you have not
                                been given access, this message appears:

                                     [User name] does not have access to
                                     [category's] department.


From Provider         Press <Enter> if you want the report to start with
Beginning             the first listing in the Provider Dictionary.
                      If you want to start with a different Provider, delete
                      Beginning and enter the mnemonic, from the Provider
                      Dictionary of the MIS module, of the Provider at which
                      which you want the statistics listing to begin.

                      A Lookup is available.


Thru Provider         Press <Enter> if you want the report to stop at the
End                   last Provider listed in the Provider Dictionary. If
                      you want it to stop with a different Provider, delete
                      End and enter the mnemonic, from the Provider Dictionary
                      of the MIS Module, of the doctor at which you want the
                      statistics listing to end. A Lookup is available.


Detail                Enter an "N" if do not want the statistics for each
                      procedure for each Doctor to print.


Totals                Enter an "N" if you do not want the totals for all
                      of the procedures for each Doctor to print.


Grand Total           Enter an "N" if you do not want the total of all of
                      the procedures for all of the Doctors for the period or
                      date range entered to print.
List Location Statistics (11.4)                                           Page 250



11.4:    List Location Statistics


This routine prints data about procedures ordered in a location or a range of
locations during a specific general ledger period. The report sorts by
category, not by procedure. If you want a list sorted by procedure, use the
Daily Procedure Statistics Routine or the Period Procedure Statistics Routine.

A separate page is devoted to each category and a separate line to each
location. The report shows these values for the category:

                * the quantity, or number, of procedures ordered
                * the dollar amount of that quantity (quantity x unit price)
                * the unit value of that quantity (quantity x unit value)
                  (a unit value, or the time ordinarily taken to complete a
                   procedure, can be set up in the Procedure Dictionary)

The report also includes totals of these values:

                * for each location
                * year-to-date for each location
                * year-to-date for all locations

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           List Location Statistics                            |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Period                                                                         |
|                                                                               |
|Start Date                                                                     |
|End Date                                                                       |
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|From Location                                                                  |
|Thru Location                                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|Include Detail?                                                                |
|         Totals?                                                               |
|    Grand Total?                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Period                  Use the Lookup to view a list of periods for which
                        you can order statistics about procedures. Enter the
                        mnemonic of the period of interest.


Start Date              Enter a date which is at least today minus the
List Location Statistics (11.4)                                            Page 251



                      number of days for the statistics cutoff. (The
                      statistics cutoff is defined as the DAYS TO UPDATE STATS
                      prompt in the OE parameters.)


End Date              Enter a date   which is after the Start Date but
                      before today   minus the number of days for the statistics
                      cutoff. (The   statistics cutoff is defined as the DAYS TO
                      UPDATE STATS   prompt in the OE parameters.)


Department/Category    You can identify a department or a category.


                      Identifying a Department

                      Under some circumstances, the mnemonic for a department
                      appears at this prompt. If you want to print location
                      statistics for that department, press <Enter>. If you
                      want to print location statistics for a different
                      department, delete the default response and follow the
                      directions below.

                      If no department name appears, enter a mnemonic, from
                      the Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that
                      identifies the department for which you want to print
                      location statistics. A Lookup is available.

                      Note:   You can identify only departments to
                              which you are explicitly given access in the MIS
                              User Dictionary, at the "Access to OE routines
                              for departments:" prompt. If you try to identify
                              a department to which you have not been given
                              access, this message appears:

                                     [User name] does not have access to
                                     [department name]


                      Identifying a Category

                      If you want to identify a category instead   of a
                      department, delete the default response to   this prompt,
                      if any. Enter the letter C, followed by a    space,
                      followed by the mnemonic of the category.    A Lookup is
                      available.

                      Note:   You can identify only categories in
                              departments to which you are given access in the
                              MIS User Dictionary. If you try to identify a
List Location Statistics (11.4)                                          Page 252



                              category in a department to which you have not
                              been given access, this message appears:

                                   [User name] does not have access to
                                   [category's] department.


From Location         Enter <Enter> if you want the statistics to start
Beginning             with the first location listed in the Location
                      Dictionary. If you want to start with a different
                      location, delete Beginning and enter the mnemonic, from
                      the Location Dictionary, of the location at which you
                      want the statistics listing to begin. A Lookup is
                      available.


Thru Location         Enter <Enter> if you want the report to end at the
End                   last listing in the Location Dictionary. If you
                      want it to end with a different location, delete End and
                      enter the mnemonic, from the Location Dictionary, of the
                      location at which you want the statistics listing to
                      end. A Lookup is available.


Detail                Enter an "N" if do not want the statistics for each
                      procedure for each Location to print.


Totals                Enter an "N" if you do not want the totals for all
                      of the procedures for each Location to print.


Grand Total           Enter an "N" if you do not want the total of all of
                      the procedures for all of the Locations for the period
                      or date range entered to print.
List Technician Statistics (11.5)                                       Page 253



11.5:    List Technician Statistics


This routine prints data about the procedures performed by a technician or
several technicians during a specified general ledger period.

A separate page of the report is devoted to each category. Each line of the
report corresponds to an individual technician, and shows these values for the
procedure in each of three Care Areas (Inpatient, Outpatient, and Emergency
Room):

                * the quantity, or number, of the procedure ordered
                * the dollar amount for that quantity (quantity x unit price)
                * the unit value of that quantity (quantity x unit value)
                  (a unit value, or time ordinarily taken to complete a
                   procedure, can be set up in the Procedure Dictionary)

The report also includes totals of these values:

                *   by Care Area
                *   for each technician
                *   for all technicians
                *   year-to-date for each technician
                *   year-to-date for all technicians

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                          List Technician Statistics                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Period                                                                         |
|                                                                               |
|Start Date                                                                     |
|End Date                                                                       |
|                                                                               |
|Department/Category                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|From Technician                                                                |
|Thru Technician                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|Include Detail?                                                                |
|         Totals?                                                               |
|    Grand Total?                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Period                   Use the Lookup to view a list of periods for which
                         you can order statistics about procedures. Enter the
                         mnemonic of the period of interest.
List Technician Statistics (11.5)                                          Page 254



                      To enter a date range <Enter> past this prompt.


Start Date            Enter a date which is at least today minus the
                      number of days for the statistics cutoff. (The
                      statistics cutoff is defined as the DAYS TO UPDATE STATS
                      prompt in the OE parameters.)



End Date              Enter a date   which is after the Start Date but
                      before today   minus the number of days for the statistics
                      cutoff. (The   statistics cutoff is defined as the DAYS TO
                      UPDATE STATS   prompt in the OE parameters.)


Department/Category    You can identify a department or a category.


                      Identifying a Department

                      Under some circumstances, the mnemonic for a department
                      appears at this prompt. If you want to list technician
                      statistics for that department, press <Enter>. If you
                      want to list technician statistics for a different
                      department, delete the default response and follow the
                      directions below.

                      If no department name appears, enter a mnemonic, from
                      the Location Dictionary of the MIS Module, that
                      identifies the department for which you want to list
                      technician statistics. A Lookup is available.

                      Note:   You can identify only departments to
                              which you are explicitly given access in the MIS
                              User Dictionary, at the "Access to OE routines
                              for departments:" prompt. If you try to identify
                              a department to which you have not been given
                              access, this message appears:

                                     [User name] does not have access to
                                     [department name]


                      Identifying a Category

                      If you want to identify a category instead   of a
                      department, delete the default response to   this prompt,
                      if any. Enter the letter C, followed by a    space,
                      followed by the mnemonic of the category.    A Lookup is
List Technician Statistics (11.5)                                         Page 255



                      available.

                      Note:   You can identify only categories in
                              departments to which you are given access in the
                              MIS User Dictionary. If you try to identify a
                              category in a department to which you have not
                              been given access, this message appears:

                                    [User name] does not have access to
                                    [category's] department.


From Technician       Enter <Enter> if you want the report to start with
Beginning             the first listing in the User Dictionary. If you
                      want to start with a different technician, delete
                      Beginning and enter the mnemonic, from the User
                      Dictionary of the MIS Module, of the technician at which
                      you want the statistics listing to begin. A Lookup is
                      available.


Thru Technician       Enter <Enter> if you want the report to stop at the
End                   last user listed in the User Dictionary. If you
                      want it to stop with a different technician, delete End
                      and enter the mnemonic, from the User Dictionary of the
                      MIS Module, of the technician at which you want the
                      statistics listing to end. A Lookup is available.


Detail                Enter an "N" if do not want the statistics for each
                      procedure for each technician to print.


Totals                Enter an "N" if you do not want the totals for all
                      of the procedures for each technician to print.


Grand Total           Enter an "N" if you do not want the total of all of
                      the procedures for all of the technicians for the period
                      or date range entered to print.
Monitoring Module Operations (12)                                           Page 256



Chapter 12:   Monitoring Module Operations


The Operations Routines described in this chapter are typically used by the
Data Processing Department of the facility. They help to assure the smooth
flow of information within the Order Entry Module, as well as to and from its
interfacing modules.

There are routines for controlling the printing of requisitions at their usual
destinations, and for controlling the communication of orders to interfacing
modules such as Blood Bank, Laboratory, Microbiology and Radiology.

There are routines for listing orders that are being held in queues instead of
being transmitted to printers or communicated to interfacing modules. In the
case of queues holding orders for communication to interfacing modules, a user
can print all the orders lodged in a queue.

A user can list all requisitions sent to a particular printer during a specific
time range, or list orders communicated to a particular interfacing module
during a specific time range. In the case of requisitions, he or she can also
reprint them.


Routine Summary

The table on the next page provides guidelines about which routine to choose to
perform a specific function.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Monitoring Module Operations: Tasks and Routines
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
To Perform This Function                  Use

Turn the background print job                Start/Stop Print Job
on or off

Turn an interface to a module                Turn Module Interface On/Off
on or off

List orders that were entered                List Print Job's Print Queue
but not transmitted because
they are being held in a queue

List orders that were entered                List Print Job's Delay Queue
but not transmitted because:
  - their destination device is not
    operating
  - their designated destination
    device is inappropriate, e.g.
    not a device for printing
    hard copy
Monitoring Module Operations (12)                                      Page 257



List all orders that are queued           List Device's Print Queue
to print to a specific printer

List all orders that have been            List Device Audit Trail
printed at a specific printer

List all printers which are not           List Management of Devices
processing orders

Reprint Physician Order Sheets            Recover Unprinted Provider Order
which did not print due to                Sheets
printer problems

List all orders communicated to a         List Interface Audit Trail
particular interfacing module
during a specific time period

List all orders being held in            List Interface Queue
a queue for communication to an
interfacing module

Print all orders sent to particular       Reprint Device's Orders
device during a specified time
period

Print all orders being held in an         Print Queued Interface Orders
interface queue for communication
to an interfacing module

Turn the interface between other          Turn Departmental Interface On/Off
vendor transcription systems on
or off

Print orders at a different printer       Enter/Edit Training Printer
than that defined in the Procedure
Dictionary, for the purpose of
testing or training
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Start/Stop Print Job (12.1)                                               Page 258



12.1:   Start/Stop Print Job


The background print job (OE.BKG) describes how the printing of jobs is being
handled. This routine tells users the present status of the background print
job, the background billing interface job and the background purge job, and
allows users to change it if appropriate.

When the background print job is running, the following occur:

          1) orders and requisitions entered through the Order Entry Module are
             printed at their appropriate destinations, or communicated
             directly to interfacing modules like Blood Bank, Laboratory,
             Microbiology or Radiology.

          2) orders that are in the print job's delay queue because they failed
             to print on previous tries are tried again.

          3) the system reviews orders of patients who are discharged through
             the Admissions Department, and cancels future orders.


When the background print job is not running, none of the above occurs.

The background billing interface job (OE BAR INFCE) runs once a day, just after
midnight, and only if the OE background print job is running. This job
compiles billing information to be collected by B/AR, and calculates
statistics.

The screen contains the following information:

          *   whether the background print job is currently set to run
          *   whether the background jobs are running
          *   the background job numbers
          *   whether the billing compile is completed
          *   whether the purge job is completed
          *   a prompt allowing you to indicate that you want to start or stop
              the background job


The background print job is usually set to run, and running. You would
stop the background print job for scheduled down time of the system.

The background print job could be set to run, but not running, if the
system crashes. The system should restart itself after a crash. If it
doesn't, the background print job would continue to be set to run, but
not running unless someone intervened to stop it.
Start/Stop Print Job (12.1)                                           Page 259

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                              Start/Stop Background Print Job                               |
|============================================================================================|
|When the background print job (OE BKG) is running:                                          |
| 1) orders are assigned order numbers                                                       |
| 2) orders are printed and/or interfaced                                                    |
| 3) orders that failed to print on previous tries are tried again                           |
| 4) discharges from admissions are reviewed to trigger cancelling                           |
|     of future orders                                                                       |
| 5) orders to interfaced modules which are rejected by the interfacing                      |
|     module are printed at the ordering device's printer                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|The background billing interface job (OE BAR INFCE) runs only once                          |
|a day, just after midnight. This job:                                                       |
| 1) compiles billing information for B/AR to collect                                        |
| 2) calculates statistics of the previous day's activity                                    |
| 3) will start only if OE BKG is running                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|The background jobs are currently set to           OE BKG     OE BAR     OE Purge           |
|Is the job running now?                                                                     |
|Which job number?                                                                           |
|Has the job completed?                                                                      |
|                                                                                            |
|Do you want to set the background jobs to          70                                       |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Do you want to set the background jobs to Start/Stop:

         Enter Y to change the setting of the background print job and the
         background billing interface job. That is, start both jobs if not
         running or stop if they are running, otherwise enter N.
Turn Module Interface On/Off (12.2)                                     Page 260



12.2:   Turn Module Interface On/Off


This routine allows users to turn the interface to various modules on or off.
When the module interface is on, the Order Entry Module communicates orders
directly to the interfacing module, where they are placed in a file. The
interfacing module reads the file and prints orders according to priority:
Stat, Urgent, and Routine.

When the interface to a module is turned off through this routine, orders
are re-directed to the printer designated in the OE Procedure Dictionary for
the "interface" format. The orders print in the format defined in OE system
parameters.

NOTE:   If an interface is not turned off through this routine, but the
        interfacing module is down, orders are held in the interface queue.
        Please see the section called List Interface Queue for more
        information.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                         Turn Module Interface On/Off                          |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|When the interface to a module is On:                                          |
| 1) orders for the module are put in a file and the module reads them          |
| 2) printing occurs for selected priority orders                               |
|                                                                               |
|When the interface to a module is Off:                                         |
| 1) orders are simply printed at the device specified in the procedure         |
|     dictionary for the 'interface' format                                     |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Module                                                                         |
|                                                                               |
|The Interface To Module Is Currently                                           |
|                                                                               |
|Do You Want To Turn The Interface                                              |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Turn Module Interface On/Off (12.2)                                    Page 261



Module                Enter the mnemonic of the interfacing module for
                      which the user would like to check: LAB, MIC, BBK, PTH,
                      RAD, NUR, PHA, and MM.



Turn the Interface   On/Off?

                      Enter Y to change the current state of the interface
                      -- that is, turn it off if it is on, or turn it
                      on if it is off.

                      Enter N in order for the interface to remain in its
                      current state.
List Print Job's Print Queue (12.3)                                    Page 262



12.3:   List Print Job's Print Queue


This routine allows users to print a list of all orders that were entered for
printing but are being held in a printing queue instead of being transmitted.

An order is held in a printing queue when it is for a procedure from a category
that holds future orders and it is ordered for a future service date. Such
orders are not transmitted on entry, but are held in a printing queue until
12:05 AM on the service date of the order. (A Category that holds future
orders is one in which the response to the HOLD FUTURE ORDERS prompt in the
Category Dictionary is Yes.)



+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               List Print Queue                                |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Print Date:                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Print Date:                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


From Print Date       Enter the date at which users want the list of orders
                      in the print queue to begin. Use the standard date
                      format or a T combination.


Thru Print Date       Enter the date at which users want the list of orders
                      in the print queue to end. Use the standard format
                      or a T combination.
List Print Job's Delay Queue (12.4)                                    Page 263



12.4:   List Print Job's Delay Queue


This routine allows users to print a list of all orders that have not been
printed because:

         * a destination printer was not operating, due to malfunction or
           disconnection

         * they were sent to an inappropriate device such as a terminal that
           does not print hard copy

The routine enables Health Care Organization personnel to check the location of
a verified order that is not transmitted.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               List Delay Queue                                |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Initial Try Date:                                                         |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Initial Try Date:                                                         |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


From Initial Try Date Users must press <Enter> in order for the list to
                      begin on the first-try date of the order first lodged in
                      the queue. If users would like to start at another date,
                      delete BEGINNING and enter the date on which they would
                      like to begin the list, using the standard format, or a T
                      combination.


Thru Initial Try Date Users must press <Enter> in order for the list to
                      end on the current date, which appears as the default
                      response. If users would like the list to end on a
                      different date, delete the current date and enter the
                      desired date. Use the standard format or a T combination.
List Device's Print Queue (12.5)                                      Page 264



12.5:   List Device's Print Queue


This routine allows users to list all the requisitions that are waiting to be
printed at a specific printer. The user simply enters the name of the device
(printer) for which they would like to view the list.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                            List Device Print Queue                            |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Device                                                                     |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


For Device            Enter the mnemonic of the device (printer) for which
                      the user would like to see an audit trail. A Lookup is
                      available.
List Device Audit Trail (12.6)                                             Page 265



12.6:    List Device Audit Trail


This   routine allows users to list all   the requisitions that have been printed
at a   specific printer. Because users    can specify the date at which they would
like   the list to begin and end, users   can print a list for part of a day, a
day,   a few days, a week, a month, and   so forth.

The routine is useful for analyzing the activity of a printer, or for checking
on whether a particular requisition was in fact printed at a printer during a
specific time period.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                             List Device Audit Trail                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Device                                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|Starting Date           Time                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Ending Date             Time                                                   |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


For Device             Users enter the mnemonic of the device (printer)
                       they would like to view an audit trail for. A Lookup is
                       available.


Starting Date          Users enter the date on which they would like the
                       list to begin, using the standard format or a T
                       combination.


Time                   Users enter the time at which they would like the
                       list to begin, using the standard format or N for Now.


Ending Date            Users enter the date on which they would like the
                       list to end, using the standard format or a T
                       combination.


Time                   Users enter the time at which they would like the
                       list to end, using the standard format, or N for Now.
List Management Of Devices (12.7)                                      Page 266



12.7:   List Management Of Devices


This routine will allow you to print a list of printers that are not
processing/printing orders. The printers will display with a tally of how many
items are in the queue for each particular printer device.

Upon selecting the List Management of Devices Routine, the user is immediately
prompted to enter a device where the list is to be printed. The list will
contain the Date, Run Time, Run User, Device, Job, Last Activity Date and Time,
and the Print Queue Entries.
Recover Unprinted Provider Order Sheets (12.8)                         Page 267



12.8:   Recover Unprinted Provider Order Sheets


This routine allows you to reprint Provider Order Sheets that have failed to
print due to the printer being busy or other hardware issues. The Order Sheets
can be printed from this routine in those instances where the designated
printer continues to be unavailable.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                    Recover Unprinted Provider Order Sheets                    |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Device                                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|Starting Date           Time                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Ending Date             Time                                                   |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


For Device           Enter the mnemonic of the device at which you would
                     like to reprint the Provider Order Sheet.


Starting Date        Enter the date at which you would like the Provider
                     Orders Sheets to print for. Use the standard date
                     format or a T combination.


Time                 Enter the time at which you would like the list to
                     begin. Use the standard time format or N for Now.


Ending Date          Enter the date at which you would like the Provider
                     Orders Sheets to print for. Use the standard date format
                     or a T combination.


Time                 Enter the time at which you would like the list to
                     end. Use the standard time format or N for Now.
List Interface Audit Trail (12.9)                                      Page 268



12.9:   List Interface Audit Trail


This routine allows users to print a list of all orders that have been
communicated directly to an interfacing module. Due to the fact that a user
can specify the date at which they would like the list to begin and end, they
can print a list for part of a day, a day, a few days, a week, a month, and so
forth.

The routine is useful for checking orders that were communicated directly to an
interfacing module, as well as for analyzing the activity of a specific
interfacing module.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                          List Interface Audit Trail                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Interface                                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|Starting Date           Time                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Ending Date             Time                                                   |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


For Interface         Enter the mnemonic of the interfacing module of
                      interest: BBK, LAB, MIC, PTH, RAD, NUR, PHA, or MM.    A
                      Lookup is available.


Starting Date         Enter the date on which users would like the list to
                      begin, using the standard format or a T combination.


Time                  Enter the time at which users would like the list to
                      begin, using the standard format or N for Now.


Ending Date           Enter the date on which users would like the list to
                      end, using the standard format or a T combination.


Time                  Enter the time at which users would like the list to
                      end, using the standard format, or N for Now.
List Interface Queue (12.10)                                           Page 269



12.10:   List Interface Queue


This routine allows users to print a list of orders that are in a queue
awaiting transmission to an interfacing module.

Upon entering an order for a procedure in a category that has an interface to
another module, that order is put in a queue for the interfacing module if:

                * the module interface is turned on through the
                  Turn Module Interface On/Off Routine

                          and

                * the interfacing module is operating properly

When these conditions are present, the interfacing module removes orders from
the queue for processing.

If an interfacing module is turned off through the Turn Module Interface
On/Off Routine, orders for that interfacing module are printed at the
printer designated in the Procedure Dictionary.

If an interfacing module is turned on through the Turn Module Interface On/Off
Routine but the interfacing module is not operating properly, orders
simply stay in the queue. Users can get a list of those orders through this
routine. If it is expected that the interfacing module will be inoperative for
an extended period, a user can print the queued orders through the Print Queued
Interface Orders Routine.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                             List Interface Queue                              |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Interface                                                                  |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


For Interface          Enter the mnemonic of the interfacing module of
                       interest: BBK, LAB, MIC, PTH, RAD, NUR, PHA, or MM.   A
                       Lookup is available.
Reprint Device's Orders (12.11)                                        Page 270



12.11:   Reprint Device's Orders


This routine allows users to reprint all requisitions that were printed on a
device during a specific period, which could be measured in minutes, hours,
days, weeks or months. All requisitions printed through this routine are
marked ***REPRINT***.

The routine can be used to replace a lost or misplaced order, or to analyze the
activity at a given device.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                             Reprint Device's Orders                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Device                                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|Starting Date           Time                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Ending Date             Time                                                   |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


For Device            Users enter the mnemonic of the device (printer)
                      they would like to view an audit trail for. A Lookup is
                      available.


Starting Date         Users enter the date on which they would like the
                      list to begin, using the standard format or a T
                      combination.


Time                  Users enter the time at which they would like the
                      list to begin, using the standard format or N for Now.


Ending Date           Users enter the date on which they would like the
                      list to end, using the standard format or a T
                      combination.


Time                  Users enter the time at which they would like the
                      list to end, using the standard format, or N for Now.
Print Queued Interface Orders (12.12)                                   Page 271



12.12:   Print Queued Interface Orders


If a module   interface is turned on through the Turn Module Interface On/Off
Routine but   the interfacing module is not operating properly, orders for
that module   will remain in a queue for transmission to the module. Users can
print those   orders through this routine.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                         Print Queued Interface Orders                         |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|When the interface for a module is turned on in the Order Entry Module,        |
|orders placed for that interfaced module are put in a queue for it to read.    |
|The interfacing module itself removes orders from the queue and automatically |
|processes them.                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|If the interface is turned off in the Order Entry module, new orders are       |
|printed at the device specified in the dictionary instead of being queued      |
|for processing.                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|If the interface is turned on in the Order Entry module but there are          |
|problems with the interfacing module, orders will simply stay in the queue.    |
|                                                                               |
|This routine processes orders in the queue by printing them and then removing |
|them from the queue. It should be used when an interface is expected to be     |
|down for a long time and the interface has been turned off in Order Entry.     |
|                                                                               |
|Print Orders IN Queue For Interface                                            |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Print Orders in Queue for Interface

                       Enter the mnemonic of the interfacing module for which
                       the user would like to print queued orders. A Lookup is
                       available.
Turn Departmental Interface On/Off (12.13)                             Page 272



12.13:   Turn Departmental Interface On/Off


This routine is used by Health Care Organizations that incorporate other vendor
systems that will interface with MEDITECH's Departmental Option. This
interface must be turned on in order for the information to flow over the
interface.   When the interface is turned off, the information will not flow
between the interfacing Vendor and MEDITECH.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                      Turn Departmental Interface On/Off                       |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|The Interface To Departmental Is Currently                                     |
|                                                                               |
|                 Job                                                           |
|                                                                               |
|Do You Want To Turn The Interface                                              |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Do You Want To Turn The Interface

          Enter Y to change the setting of the Departmental Interface job That
          is, start the job if not running or stop it if it is running,
          otherwise enter N.
Enter/Edit Training Printer (12.14)                                     Page 273



12.14:    Enter/Edit Training Printer


This Routine allows users to define a different printer for orders to print
than the printer defined in the Procedure Dictionary. It is useful for testing
order output and conducting training classes.

Note:    This routine does not affect where reports will print.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                          Enter/Edit Training Printer                          |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|The Training Printer parameter is currently                                    |
|                                                                               |
|Set the Training Printer parameter to                                          |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


The TRAINING PRINTER parameter is currently

                     This field displays the mnemonic of the printer currently
                     specified.

Set the TRAINING PRINTER parameter to

                     Enter/Edit the mnemonic of the printer on which you want to
                     print orders during testing/training.

                     Lookup:   Device Table
System Conventions (13)                                                Page 274



Chapter 13:   System Conventions


Most MEDITECH Modules use the same conventions for basic system functions such
as signing on to a module, entering and filing information, and obtaining
on-line help. A complete description of those conventions is available in the
NPR System Conventions User Manual, which is available from MEDITECH.

There are a few system conventions that are specific to the Order Entry Module.
Examples are:

               Hardware Requirements

               Managed Terminals and Restricted Users

               Identifying a Patient


Those conventions are described in this chapter, which also includes a list of
standard menus in the Order Entry Module.
Managed Terminals and Restricted Users (13.1)                              Page 275



13.1:    Managed Terminals and Restricted Users


A terminal can be associated with one or more locations in the health care
organization. The association is made in the Location Dictionary of the MIS
Module at the TERMINALS prompt. A terminal that is associated with one or
more terminals is called a "managed" terminal.

If a terminal is associated with only one location, that location appears as
the default response to the LOCATION prompt on any routine. If a terminal is
associated with more than one location, there is no default response to the
LOCATION prompt. When a user tries to enter an inappropriate location,
however, this message appears:

                This device is not associated with that location.


In addition, users can be restricted with respect to the patients they can gain
access to, or orders they can enter. The restriction is made in the User
Dictionary of the MIS Module, at the RESTRICTED? prompt.

A restricted user, operating from a terminal associated with a Care Area*,
can gain access only to inpatients assigned to the location(s) associated with
the terminal.

A restricted user, operating from a terminal associated with a Department*,
can order procedures only from categories within that department.


*NOTE:    Each location is designated in the Location Dictionary of
          the MIS Module as one of three types: Inpatient, Outpatient, or
          Department.

          Inpatient and Outpatient types are classified as Care Areas or
          locations that have prime responsibility for a patient's care.    An
          example is a Nursing Station to which patients are assigned.

          Departments have responsibility for administering procedures.     An
          example is Cardiology.
Identifying a Patient (13.2)                                             Page 276



13.2:   Identifying a Patient


Use the following methods to identify patients:

                                * By account number

                                * By unit number
                                  Enter U#, followed by the unit number.

                                * By full name in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME,
                                  MIDDLEINITIAL format, using up to 43
                                  characters

                                * By partial name

                                * By recalling the last patient entered in the
                                  current terminal session.

                                * By Social Security number
                                  #222222222<Enter> or #222-22-2222<Enter>

                                * By Location
                                  Enter L<spacebar> and the location mnemonic of
                                  of the patient. The system will loop through
                                  all the patients at this location.


Identifying a Patient via the Master Patient Index

If you enter the patient's full or partial name in the Enter/Edit Department
History or Process History Routine, the system begins a Soundex search of the
Master Patient Index to help you identify the patient. This process is
described in detail in the appendix titled "The Search of the Master Patient
Index" in the Medical Records Module User Manual.
Specifying Directions (13.3)                                            Page 277



13.3:   Specifying Directions


To specify directions with the following methods:

              *   One, or a combination, of these system formats:

                  - QnnD for "every n days".    For example:

                     Q2D for "at the start date specified above and every
                     2 days (48 hours) thereafter"

                  - Specific days of the week, in a sequence of two-letter
                    abbreviations, with no spacing between abbreviations. For
                    example:

                     MoWeFr for Monday, Wednesday, Friday
                     TuThSa for Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday

                  - QnnH for "every n hours".    For example:

                     Q3H for "at the start time specified above and every 3
                     hours thereafter"

                  - QnnM for "every n minutes".    For example:

                     Q30M for "every 30 minutes"

                  - The times of day in standard 24-hour format: HH or HHMM.
                    Multiple time entries should be separated by commas.
                    For example:

                     08,1230,17 for 8:00AM, 12:30PM and 5:00PM


                  To combine formats, join them with the @ symbol. For example:

                  Q4D@8,12,16,20 for every four days at 8 AM, 12 noon, 4 PM and
                  8 PM

                  TuTh@10,22 for Tuesday and Thursday at 10 AM and 10 PM


              *   A mnemonic from the Directions Dictionary of the MIS Module.
                  These are examples of typical entries in a health care
                  organization Directions Dictionary:

                  BID for twice a day, at 0800 and 1600
                  3XW for Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays

              *   More than one mnemonic from the MIS Directions Dictionary,
                  joined by the @ symbol; or a combination of Directions
Specifying Directions (13.3)                                            Page 278



                  Dictionary mnemonic with any of the above formats, joined by
                  the @ symbol. For example:

                  3XW@BID for "Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 8:00AM and
                  4:00PM"

                  3XW@10,12,1430 for "Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 10:00AM,
                  12 noon and 2:30PM"

NOTES:    *       If you combine date and time specifications, always
                  enter the date first (e.g., QD@1030).

              *   You cannot combine system formats (e.g., MoWe and Q4H)
                  unlessthe time specification format (i.e., Q4H) is
                  defined in the MIS Directions Dictionary.

              *   You can enter free-text directions for a specific order
                  (i.e., not a series order) by entering "." directly before
                  the free text. For example, a Respiratory Therapy Department
                  might enter .AS TOLERATED for nebulizer treatments.
Order Entry User Manual INDEX                                       Page 279

A                                Diets
                                   entering 227
Activity                         Directions
  Billing, View 219                specifying 277
Activity Report                  Doctor Statistics     247
  Location, Print 189
Administrative Data
  View 169                       E
Audit Trail
  Device, List 265               Edit Technician function 71
  Interface, List 268            Enter Department Orders function
                                         75
                                 Enter Requisitions 193
B                                Enter/Edit Temporary Location 175

Background Print Job
  Start/Stop 258                 H
Billing Activity
  Patient, View 219              History
Billing List                       Dietary, Print 146
  Print 220                        Patient's Dietary, Print   146
Blood Bank                         View function 81
  View Results from 157          Hospital Billing List
                                   Print 220

C
                                 I
Charge/Credit
  Issue 72                       Identifying a patient 276
Conventions                      Incomplete Orders
  system 274                       List by patient 105
Count                            Interface
  Meal 148                         Module, Turn On/Off 260
  Meal by Location   149         Interface Audit Trail
                                   List 268
                                 Interface Queue
D                                  List 269
                                 Interfaced Orders
Daily Log 214                      Print Queued 271
Daily Procedure Statistics 242   Issue Charge/Credit 72
Data
  Administrative, View 169
  Department, View 179           J
Delay Queue
  Print Job's, List 263          Job
Delete Orders function 69          Print, Start/Stop    258
Department Data
  View 179
Department Orders                L
  edit function 75
Device Audit Trail               Lab Inquiry 157
  List 265                       Labels
Device's Orders                    Meal, Print 150
  Reprint 270                      Nourishment, Print 153
Diet Review Report 147           Laboratory
                                   View Results from 157
Order Entry User Manual INDEX                                         Page 280

List                                    reporting statistics   240
  Billing, Print 220
List Daily Log 214
List Device Audit Trail 265         P
List Incomplete Orders (by
        patient) 105                Pathology
List Interface Audit Trail 268        View Results from 158
List Interface Queue 269            Pathology Inquiry 158
List Print Job's Delay Queue 263    Patient
List Print Job's Print Queue 262      identifying a 276
List Stock Requisitions 196         Patient Billing Activity
Location                              View 219
  Meal Count by 149                 Patient's Dietary History
Location Activity Report              Print 146
  Print 189                         Patient's Record
Location Statistics 250               View 156
Log                                 Period Procedure Statistics 245
  Daily 214                         Print Billing List 220
                                    Print Job
                                      Start/Stop 258
M                                   Print Job's Delay Queue
                                      List 263
Managed terminals 275               Print Job's Print Queue
Managing patients' diets 122          List 262
Meal Count by Location Report 149   Print Location Activity Report 189
Meal Count Report 148               Print Meal Count 148
Meal Labels                         Print Meal Count by Location 149
  Print 150                         Print Meal Labels 150
MEDITECH Lab Inquiry 157            Print Nourishment Labels 153
MEDITECH Pathology Inquiry 158      Print Patient's Dietary History
Microbiology                                146
  View Results from 157             Print Queue
Module Interface                      List Print Job's 262
  Turn On/Off 260                   Print Queued Interface Orders 271
                                    Procedure Statistics
                                      Daily 242
N                                     Period 245
                                    Process Orders 60
Nourishment Labels
  Print 153
                                    Q

O                                   Queue
                                      Delay, List 263
Order Entry Module                    Interface, List 269
  additional user manuals 1           Print Job's, List 262
Orders                              Queued Interface Orders
  delete function 69                  Print 271
  Interface, Print Queued 271
  Process 60
  Reprint 117                       R
  Reprint Device's 270
  reprint function 77               Reprint Device's Orders     270
Organization of manual 1            Reprint Orders 117
Overview                            Reprint orders function     77
  managing patients' diets 122      Requisitions
                                      Enter 193
Order Entry User Manual INDEX                                         Page 281

Requisitions (continued)              View Patients' Results from
  List Stock 196                              Microbiology 157
Restricted users 275                  View Results from Pathology   158
Results
  Blood Bank, View 157
  Laboratory, View 157
  Microbiology, View 157
  Pathology, View 158
Review Report
  Diet 147


S

Specifying directions 277
Start/Stop Print Job 258
Statistics
  Doctor 247
  Location 250
  viewing 240
Stock Requisitions
  List 196
System conventions 274


T

Technician
  edit 71
Temporary Location
  Enter/Edit 175
Terminal
  managed 275
Trail
  Audit, List Device 265
  Interface Audit, List 268
Turn Module Interface On/Off    260


U

User
  restricted   275


V

View Administrative Data 169
View Department Data 179
View History function 81
View Patient Billing Activity 219
View Patient's Record 156
View Patients' Results from Blood
        Bank 157
View Patients' Results from
        Laboratory 157

								
To top